JP6500190B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, an image display unit including a liquid crystal display or the like is provided on a game board in which a game area is formed, and a predetermined game is played on the display device. There is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player.

  As such a game machine, by transmitting the driving force from the drive motor through a plurality of gears and arms, the movable role unit is rotated and moved to the front of the display device, and the effect execution state and the non-effect state A gaming machine that can be converted into an execution state is provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-107157, A

However, in the traditional gaming machine, in order to move the movable won game unit in front of the display device, it did not increase interest for games.

The present invention, when operating the movable won game, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest of Yu technique.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable role operable in response to the predetermined effect, the game device is provided in front of the display device. The apparatus comprises: a drive mechanism for operating the movable part; a wire connectable to the movable part from the outside of the movable part; and a wiring guide member by which the wiring is guided, and the outer periphery of the movable part includes a fixing portion for fixing the wiring, the wiring guide member, but is disposed, the wiring guide member, Ru said wire to said movable won game that forward movement of the front Symbol display device is capable follow At the same time, when the wiring can be attached to and detached from the movable part, and the movable part is in front of the display device , the divided area divided by the movable part is the screen area of the display device. It is formed by the wiring guide member Serial characterized retainable der Rukoto wires against the direction of movement of the movable role thereof.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, the interest of a game is improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a lamp | ramp display apparatus. It is a block diagram of a game control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram of an effect control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board, a control base unit, etc. of a 1st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a control base unit of a 1st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st movable service item unit of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the front decoration movable member in which the first movable role according to the first embodiment is in an initial state. It is a front view of the front decoration movable member in which the 1st movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation state. It is a rear view of the front decoration movable member of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of the front decoration movable member of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the decoration base member of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the rotation decoration member in case the connection member of 1st Embodiment is located in the recessed part of an infinite guide groove. It is a front view of the rotation decoration member in case the connection member of 1st Embodiment is located in the convex part of an infinite guide groove. It is a front view of the 1st base member of a 1st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd movable service item unit of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd movable prize unit in the state where the 2nd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a rear view of the 2nd movable item unit except a back base member and an inside base member of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd movable character unit except the front decoration member in the state where the 2nd movable character of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a rear view of the 2nd movable item unit except the back surface base member in the state where the 2nd movable item of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 2nd movable prize unit in the state where the 2nd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a rear view of the 2nd movable service unit except the back base member in the state where the 2nd movable product of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position, and an inside base member. It is a front view of the 2nd movable prize unit except the front decoration member in the state where the 2nd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a rear view of the 2nd movable item unit except the back surface base member in the state where the 2nd movable item of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a perspective view of the 2nd movable service unit in which the 2nd movable product of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a side view of the 2nd movable service unit in which the 2nd movable service item of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a perspective view of the 2nd movable service unit in which the 2nd movable product of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a side view of the 2nd movable service unit in which the 2nd movable service item of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a side view of the 2nd movable service item unit in which the 2nd movable service item is in an operation position explaining another example of a 1st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd movable service item unit of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a rear view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a rear view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is a front view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 3rd movable prize unit when the 3rd movable prize of a 1st embodiment is in an operation position. It is an enlarged front view of the lower left movable material and drive system left front cover of a 1st embodiment. It is an enlarged view of wiring for lower left movable members of a 1st embodiment, (A) is a view of a portion where wiring guide members are bound alternately to the left and right with a binding band, (B) is a view of a portion bound on the same left side. , (C) is a diagram of the part bound on the same right side. It is an enlarged view of another example of wiring for lower left movable members of a 1st embodiment, (A) is a front view, (B) is a side view. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an initial position. It is a figure which shows an example of a screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure which shows another example of the screen display in case the 3rd movable role thing of 1st Embodiment exists in an operation position. It is a figure explaining the special prize apparatus unit of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a front view of a special prize apparatus unit, (B) is a top view of a special prize apparatus unit. It is a perspective view of the special fluctuation winning device unit in which the open / close door of the first embodiment is closed. It is a perspective view of the special fluctuation winning device unit in which the open / close door of the first embodiment is open. It is a disassembled perspective view of the special fluctuation winning combination device unit of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure explaining the decoration part of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a front view of a base member, (B) is a rear view of a front decoration member. It is a figure explaining the main-body part of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a rear view of a base member, (B) is a disassembled perspective view of a housing and an opening / closing door unit. It is a figure explaining the structure of the tongue-like member of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a top view, (B) is a front view. It is a perspective view of the opening / closing door unit explaining the operation | movement to the front-back direction of the tongue-like member of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a figure of the state which the tongue-like member advanced, (B) is the tongue-like member going backward. It is a figure of a state. It is a figure explaining the engagement axis | shaft of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a front view of an opening / closing door unit, (B) is sectional drawing of the tongue-like member in an AA, and an engagement axis | shaft. It is a bottom view of the opening / closing door unit of 1st Embodiment, (A) is a figure of the state in which the tongue-like member advanced, (B) is a figure of the state in which the tongue-like member moved backward. It is a top view of the special fluctuation winning device unit in which the open / close door of the first embodiment is closed. It is a top view of the special fluctuation winning device unit of the state where two gaming balls of a 1st embodiment flow down. It is a perspective view of the special fluctuation winning device unit of the state where two gaming balls of a 1st embodiment flow down. It is a figure explaining the rolling state of the game ball in the ball passage in which the open / close door of the first embodiment is in a closed state, (A) is a front view of the special variation winning device unit, (B) is a cross section at AA. FIG. It is an enlarged front view of the lower right part of the game board in the state where the open / close door of the first embodiment is closed. It is a front view of the lower right part of the game board in the state where the opening and closing door of the first embodiment is open. It is an expansion perspective view of the lower right part of the game board in the state where the opening and closing door of the first embodiment is closed. It is a top view of the special fluctuation winning device unit of modification 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of the special fluctuation winning combination device unit of modification 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a top view of the special fluctuation winning device unit of modification 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of the special fluctuation winning combination device unit of modification 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure explaining the shape of the protruding part and level | step difference provided in the ball passage upstream of the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment, (A) is an enlarged front view of the ball passage of modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, B) is an enlarged front view of the present modification in which the positions of the raised portion and the step are interchanged. FIG. 21 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine of the modification 4 of the first embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the special fluctuation winning combination device unit of modification 4 of a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a base member of modification 4 of a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main-body part of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining opening and closing operation of V door of modification 4 of a 1st embodiment, (A) is a front view of a housing, (B) is an A-A line sectional view at the time of V door closing state, (C ) Is a sectional view taken along the line A-A when the V door is in an open state. It is a rear perspective view of the housing in which the V-door in which the V prize-winning unit of modification 4 of a 1st embodiment was attached is closed. It is a rear perspective view of the housing in which the V-door in which the V prize-winning unit of modification 4 of a 1st embodiment was attached is an open state. FIG. 20 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device in the special game state of the second embodiment. It is a selection table of a suggestion character of a 2nd embodiment, and (A) is a table when a high probability state is determined and substitution processing is not performed, (B) is a high probability state not determined and substitution processing is not performed. A table in the case (C) is a table when the high probability state is determined and the replacement process is performed, and (D) is a table when the high probability state is not determined and the replacement process is performed. It is a reset table of the suggestion character of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 20 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device in the special game state of the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device in the special game state of the second embodiment. FIG. 20 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device in the special game state of the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the presentation in the special game state of modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of production of modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the presentation of the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a display icon table of modification 2 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the presentation of the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing the first half of the main processing by the game control device 100 executed in all the embodiments. 15 is a flowchart showing the second half of the main processing performed by the game control device 100, which is commonly executed in all embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the input process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the output process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal processing transfer setting process 1 normally performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit determination process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit determination processing performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation | variation pattern setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation | variation start information setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process (special figure 1) during a special figure fluctuation | variation process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process (special figure 2) during the special figure fluctuation | variation process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the special figure change which is commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing transition setting processing during special figure display which is commonly executed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the processing during a special figure display performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half of the processing during a special figure display performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability change frequency update process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction change frequency update process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 during fanfare / interval which is commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of small shift fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process in the fanfare / interval which is commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing change setting processing of a big winning opening open processing which is commonly executed in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during a big winning opening open performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big winning a prize opening residual ball processing commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 2 in fanfare / during interval which is commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big hit end processing shift setting processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half of the big hit end process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half of the big hit end processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal processing transfer setting process 2 commonly performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hitting middle processing shift setting processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit middle processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hitting operation shift setting processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hitting | remaining ball process transfer setting process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit residual ball process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the small hitting end processing shift setting processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit end process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal processing transfer setting processing 3 normally performed in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation command setting process for setting the production | presentation command transmitted to the production control apparatus performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pattern change control processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing (main program) performed by the presentation control apparatus performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation point control process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the point initialization process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the point update process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the point exchange process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the receiving command check process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the receiving command analysis process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation | variation type | system | group command process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation production setting process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit type | system | group command process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit type | system | group command process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation setting process of round 2nd embodiment performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation mode transfer process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the interval production setting process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol system command processing performed in common by all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot type | system | group command processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading design type command processing performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch change type | system | group command process performed commonly in all the embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round production | presentation setting process performed in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process performed in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round production | presentation setting process performed in the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process performed in the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round production | presentation setting process performed in the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production button operation presentation process performed in the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process performed in the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example by which VS reach which is one of the high reach of a degree of expectation of three embodiments is produced in order. It is a figure explaining an example by which VS reach which is one of the high reach of a degree of expectation of three embodiments is produced in order. It is a time chart in an example by which VS reach which is one of the high reach of a degree of expectation of three embodiments is produced in order. It is a screen transition diagram explaining the example (replacement example) which performs the same VS reach in a different mode as the history of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining the example (switching example) which performs SP reach of a type (system | strain) different from SP reach | history of the log | history of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation timing of each prize in the change production of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of correction production of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining an example of the continuous presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining an example of the continuous presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining an example of the continuous presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the operation timing of the variable display game of a 3rd embodiment, and a bonus. It is a screen transition figure in case not the log | history of SP reach of 3rd Embodiment but the display same as pre-reading effect (pending display change) is displayed in a 3rd movable role thing. It is a screen transition figure explaining an example of the judgment production performed in modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure explaining an example of the judgment production performed in modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure explaining an example of the judgment production performed in modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure explaining an example of the judgment production performed in modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of the determination effect performed in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of the determination effect performed in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart in another example of the judgment production performed in modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure in case the pseudo | simulation consecutive presentation in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment is performed. It is a screen transition figure in case the pseudo | simulation consecutive presentation in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment is performed. It is a screen transition diagram showing another example of the pseudo continuous effect of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram showing another example of the pseudo continuous change of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart of modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect content determination process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a change pattern table referred in the effect content determination processing of a 3rd embodiment, (A) is a loss change pattern table, (B) is a hit change pattern table. It is a figure showing the difference of the fluctuation time value of each SP reach of a 3rd embodiment. It is an effect content determination process which performs effect control of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 10 common to all the embodiments of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board, main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) or the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 etc. It can be accessed.

  Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are disposed. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

  In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. The projecting effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect and the like according to the progressing state of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

  The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

  The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state or a state where probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high in a variable display game (certain change state, probability change state) ), Small hitting game state (small hit state).

  Here, the definite change state (specific game state) is continued until the next big hit occurs (loop type), and is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (count cut type, ST), and There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it wins a predetermined probability fall lottery.

  Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

  The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (speed) for firing the game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game is performed in various launch modes with different launch rates. I can shoot a ball. The firing modes include a left strike (normal strike) in which the gaming ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right strike in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10, which is common to all the embodiments of the present invention.

  As shown to FIG. 2A, the game board 30 is provided with the flat form game board main body 30a used as the attachment base of various members. The game board body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40c for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the gaming balls having passed the warp passage 40c can roll. A portion 40b is provided. The stage portion 40 b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so the gaming balls rolled on the stage portion 40 b are the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is easy to win a prize.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is disposed in the left lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also disposed in the right lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided on the general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special view variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 having a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 37 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not normally win the fluctuation prize device 37. When the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called Vello-type ordinary motorized symbol, and is rotated via the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is changed to the open state (the easy-to-win prize state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common drawing fluctuation display game higher than usual, or the normal gaming state The time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state by lengthening the generation time of the easy-to-win state more than the easy-to-win state generated in. Even in the definite change state (except for the latent change), the short time state (general charge support state) occurs redundantly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the large winning opening is opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side by the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) A special fluctuation winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the mouth, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening.

  When the game ball wins in the special winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of balls is discharged from the dispenser to the upper tray 21. In addition, in the gaming area 32 below the normal change winning device 37, an out port 30b is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and the common drawing fluctuation display game are executed outside the gaming area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, and the details of the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, or the special fluctuation winning apparatus 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening won through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21.

  The common drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common drawing start gate 34. When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the common drawing fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the hit judgment random number value extracted at this time.

  A state in which a common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when a common drawing fluctuation display game has already been played and the common drawing fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and it is normal When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 34, the number of common drawing start memories is added (+1) if the number is lower than the upper limit number.

  A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

  When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is Winning is acceptable.

  The winning on the starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball and the winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball in the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number, and the game ball winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is special figure 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number.

  When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special view reserve storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special view start winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special view start winning memory is displayed on the special view 1 hold display 54 or the special view 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start win number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display 41 Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 or the first start storage. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation display game with the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variation prize device 37 or the second start storage.

  The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identification information (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52) It is carried out by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after changing and displaying the special symbol and the special figure). Further, in the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numerals etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. Furthermore, in the decoration special figure variation display game, as the other decoration special symbols (identification information), in the lamp display portions 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol 4th symbol) fluctuates. The variable display of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 is stopped at a predetermined time after the start, at "off" in the case of outliers, and at "on" in the case of big hit or small hit.

  As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the winning of the game ball to starting starting winning a prize opening 36 or normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is done at specified timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is big hit value) A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

  At this time, the special variation winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energization to the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time, a bonus is given that the player can acquire many gaming balls. Ru.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hitting value), the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result aspect (small hit result aspect) is derived | led-out by display design as a result of, and it will be in a small hit state. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined short time by energization to the big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 39 continuously is set. If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special fluctuation winning device 39 is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the small hit flag is set, the special fluctuation winning game The device 39 is opened.

  In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be comprised as a separate display, and may be comprised as the same display, each special figure fluctuation display game is not performed simultaneously Is set as

  With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. The special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there are special figure 1 variation display games and start figures of the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (39a ) Uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects gaming balls using the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

  FIG. 2B is a view showing the configuration of the lamp display device 80 provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. As shown in FIG. The lamp display device 80 executes lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later) and start of each special view fluctuation display game It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying of the number of storages (number of reservations). The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink in a predetermined blinking cycle as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general display 53 of the collective display 50 is measured by the game control apparatus 100, the lamp of the lamp display 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display portions 3 and 4 (decorative special view 1 hold LED 1 and decorative special view 1 hold LED 2) display the decorative special view 1 reserve number (first start memory number) according to the light off state, the lighting state, and the blink state. Similarly, the lamp display portions 5 and 6 (decorative special view 2 hold LED1, decorative special view 2 hold LED 2) are the decorative special view 2 reserve number (second start memory number) depending on the light off state, lighting state, and blink state. indicate.

  The flashing cycle of the lamp display unit 1 or 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the flashing cycle of the lamp display unit 3-6 (decoration of special drawing) may be the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 msec off). The flashing cycle may be made different so that it is easy to distinguish the decoration special drawing reservation and the fourth special symbol. Also, the on / off (display / non-display) time of the lamp display section 1-6 may be made different.

(First embodiment [configuration of gaming machine, wiring guide, variation winning device, etc.])
[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100 (main board), and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and is connected to a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). ), An input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock serving as an operation clock of the CPU, timer interrupts, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 260 Be done.

  The power supply unit 260 includes a normal power supply unit 270 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V and 5 V from 32 V A backup power supply unit 280 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence of power failure And the like, and a control signal generation unit 290 that generates and outputs control signals such as.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 260 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply unit 280 and the control signal generation unit 290 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control apparatus 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are to be replaced when changing the model, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 280 and the control signal generation unit 290 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply device 260 or the main substrate. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 280 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 290 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 270, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111 c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. To be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a random access memory (RAM) 111c which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111 b or the RAM 111 c.

  Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as a line of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP 1 reach) , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special pattern variation display game, a big hit random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining a pattern random number, a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (including an execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach) And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the lent ball request signal from the card unit (not shown), and performs control for causing the lent balls to be dispensed.

  A radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a gate switch 34a of the common view starting gate 34, and a starting opening in the first starting winning opening 36 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a in second starting winning opening 37, winning opening switch 35a, special winning opening switch 39a of special variation winning device 39, high level supplied from these switches is 11V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as 7 V at a low level and converts it into a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124 .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

  Further, to the second input port 123, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and the payout busy signal is a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command It is a signal which shows whether or not.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 260. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the enable signal CE2 being asserted (changed to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  A signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 etc is transmitted to the input unit 120 via the second input port 123. It is input.

  Further, the input unit 120 is based on a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, and an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24. A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a touch switch signal and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full). Further, the frame radio wave unauthorized signal and the payout busy signal output from the payout control device 200 are input to the first input port 122.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 260 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 260 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that the game can not be controlled is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shooting test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 is opened / closed data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37 c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39 b opening the special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the common power solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. It is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 260 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights the decoration lamp, and the motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A decoration control command signal (rendering command) such as a decoration special drawing reserve number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 via the command I / F 331 Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). The panel decoration device 46 may include the above-described lamp display device 80.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 270 of the power supply device 260 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above or an electronic component controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to

  Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 270.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 290 of the power supply device 260 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in to determine the hit / off of the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the generic image fluctuation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a hit, the common drawing indicator displays a special result mode, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) control to open as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in starting winning a prize opening 36, big hit judgment of special figure 1 fluctuation indication game on the basis of starting memory The random number value for extraction is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, special figure 2 random display random number value of the fluctuation display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. In other words, the game control means performs game progression control of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 I

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and generates the special gaming state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 second) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until a certain condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeatedly) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) I do. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed to set the regular drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time shortening operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is more than when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the open time of the subtractor increases substantially, it becomes a common charge support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the general-purpose power transmission support is executed in the short time state repeatedly.

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to reduce the time to make the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above (general drawing fluctuation time) a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example, , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shortened than usual, and time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game can be controlled to be a second stopping time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stopping time (for example, 1604 msec) It is.

  Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is released, the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) of the opening time (general power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) that is longer than that is obtained.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set to the 2nd open frequency (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (popular drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time saving state, winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is facilitated more than in the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to open in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Structure of gaming machine]
FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 and the control base unit 400 according to the first embodiment. The game board (game board unit) 30 is fixed to the front of the control base unit 400. The display device 41 is fixed to the back of the control base unit 400 in alignment with the opening of the control base unit 400. Various kinds of prizes are arranged in the control base unit 400. Among them, when they are at the initial position, they are hidden by the game board unit 30, so it is difficult to visually recognize in front view. Further, the opening of the game board unit 30 is formed so that the display device 41 can be viewed.

  The game board 30 has a center case (game effect structure) 40, a special variation winning apparatus unit 700, a start winning opening unit 800, a general winning opening unit 840, and a ball on the front of the veneer board 30a which is a base member of the game board 30. The guide part 850 is fitted and comprised. These units and members are fitted to the game board 30 and electrically connected to the game control apparatus 100 etc., and transmit detection signals of switches included in each unit and drive power to solenoids included in each unit. It becomes a road.

  The special variation winning device unit 700 is a device in which the special winning opening is opened in the special gaming state, and has one general winning opening 35 on the right side in addition to the special winning opening.

  The start winning opening unit 800 is a unit provided with the special drawing 1 and the start winning opening of the special drawing 2, and the general winning opening unit 840 is a unit provided with a plurality of general winning openings 35.

  The ball guiding portion 850 is a member for rolling the gaming ball having flowed down the right side of the gaming area 32 in the lateral direction and guiding it to the special fluctuation winning device 39 or the like.

  Further, the three-stage flow path 40 e and the left ball guiding portion 40 d provided at the lower left portion of the center case 40 are provided to guide the gaming ball to the middle of the game area 32.

[Control base unit]
FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the control base unit 400 according to the first embodiment. The third movable service unit 600, the second movable service unit 500, and the first movable service unit 410 are attached in this order to the control base 401, which is a housing for storing the product. Further, ball discharge paths 402 and 403 are attached and fixed to the lower part of the first movable part unit 410 from the front.

  The control base 401 has a predetermined depth to accommodate each movable service unit, and the upper plate 401a, the left plate 401b, the lower plate 401c, and the right plate 401d are integrally formed with the back plate 401e at the bottom. . An opening 401 f for making the display screen visible is formed in the back plate 401 e, and the display device 41 is attached to the back of the opening 401 f.

  The first movable character part unit 410 is a top of the rectangular structure and located above the display device 41. The front decorative movable member 411 (see FIG. 7) which can be reciprocated, and the rotationally movable rotation. A first movable part 410a having a decorative member 430 (see FIG. 7) is provided.

  As described later, in the first movable service unit 410, the second base member 449 includes an upper side 449a, a left side 449b, a lower side 449c, and a right side 449d.

  The second movable service unit 500 includes a second movable product 500a which moves to the center of the front surface of the display device 41 in the operating state with the lower side of the display device 41 as an initial position. When moving from the initial position to the operating position, the second movable part 500 a rotates the pair of arms 505 upward to rotate the propeller 501.

  The third movable part unit 600 includes a pair of movable parts (a third movable part 600 a) that moves to the left and right of the front surface of the display device 41 in the operating state with the outer edge of the display device 41 as an initial position. The third movable part 600 a can operate in conjunction with other movable parts.

  FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the first movable service unit 410 of the first embodiment.

  In the first movable role unit 410, a gate-shaped first base member 440 is attached to a rectangular second base member 449, and a rotating decoration member (first movable member) 430 is provided near the upper center of the first base member 440. The decorative base member (decorative plate) 420 and the front decorative movable member (second movable member) 411 are attached in this order from the front.

  The first base member 440 includes an upper side 440a, a left side 440b, and a right side 440c.

  A motor 441 is disposed on the upper side portion 440a of the first base member 440 as a drive source for rotating the rotary decoration member 430, and a shaft portion for pivotally supporting the rotary decoration member 430 near the center of the upper side. 443 are formed.

  The left side 440b is provided with a cover plate 440e which is a member that can be decorated and can hide the driving mechanism such as the motor 449 (see FIG. 15) from the line of sight of the player.

  The right side portion 440d is provided with a right movable member (third movable member) 444 movable in the vertical direction.

  The second base member 449 includes an upper side 449a, a left side 449b, a lower side 449c, and a right side 449d. The upper side 449a is entirely decorated with the decoration base member 420, and a lower left decorative portion 449f is provided on the center left side of the upper side 449a, and a decorative portion 449g is provided on the central right side.

[First movable role]
FIG. 8 is a front view of the front decoration movable member 411 with the first movable part 410a of the first embodiment in the initial state, and FIG. 9 shows the first movable part 410a of the first embodiment in the operating state. It is a front view of a certain front decoration movable member 411.

  The first movable part 410a includes a front decoration movable member 411, a decoration base member 420, and a rotating decoration member 430. The front decoration movable member 411 and the decoration base member 420 internally include an illumination source (not shown). Further, a part of the front decoration movable member 411 and the decoration base member 420 are provided with a multifaceted decoration for reflecting and scattering the illumination light supplied from the inside and the periphery from the outside and having an outer shape of It is formed of a translucent member.

  The front decoration movable member 411 disposed on the front surface of the decoration base member 420 includes the front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b, and as shown in FIG. 9, the front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration The movable member 411b can be separated in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the rotating decoration member 430 disposed on the back of the decoration base member 420 includes a pair of fins 431 to which a decoration is applied. The fins 431 in the initial position are not visible from the front because they are hidden from the back of the decoration base member 420, but as shown in FIG. The fins 431 are visible on the upper and lower sides of the decoration base member 420 formed in a horizontal and substantially rectangular shape.

  The inside of the fin 431 is provided with a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light incident in the attachment direction of the fin 431 forward, and the fin 431 itself is formed as a light guide plate. And the whole fin 431 is formed of a translucent member.

  As will be described later, the front decoration movable member 411 interlocks and reciprocates four times in the oblique left-right direction each time the rotary decoration member 430 (cam plate 433) makes one rotation.

  As described above, when the first movable part 410a is in the initial position, the fins 431 can not be visually recognized in a front view, and the front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b are in contact with each other. When the first movable part 410a is in the operating position, the fins 431 are visible in a front view, and the front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b are separated. Then, the front decoration movable member 411 and the rotary decoration member 430 reciprocate or rotate the initial position and the operation position repeatedly in conjunction with each other.

  FIG. 10 is a back view of the front decoration movable member 411 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 12 is a front view of the decorative base member 420 of the first embodiment.

  The front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b are provided with a connecting member 432 (see FIGS. 13 and 14) engaged with the rotary decoration member 430. The connection member 432 is fixed to a connection port (screw hole) 413 provided on the back surface of the front decoration movable member 411.

  In addition, on the back surface of the front decoration movable member 411, a plurality of support bodies 414 for attaching the slide pin 424 are formed. Each support 414 is provided with a slide hole 414 a for holding the end of the slide pin 424 through, and each support 414 can reach the slide pin 424 provided in the decorative base member 420. And have a predetermined height direction length.

  A pair of supports 414 is formed on the upper rear and lower rear of the front left decorative movable member 411a, respectively, and the pair of supports 414 holds the corresponding slide pins 424 from both sides, thereby the front left decoration The movable member 411 a is supported by the decorative base member 420. The slide pin 424 has engaging portions 424 a that engage with the slide holes 414 a of the support 414 at both ends. The engaging portion 424a is formed with a flange that restricts the slide hole 414a from moving to the left and right, and is held by the support 414 by the engaging portion 424a.

  Also, similarly, a pair of supports 414 are formed on the upper back and lower back of the front right decoration movable member 411b, respectively, and each pair of supports 414 holds the corresponding slide pin 424 from both sides. The front right decoration movable member 411 b is supported by the decoration base member 420.

  The front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b each include a bottom member 418 (418a, 418b) provided with a diffusion sheet (not shown) for diffusing light. The bottom member 418 may include an LED substrate instead of, or together with the diffusion sheet.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the decorative base member 420 is provided with a plurality of rectangular opening members 422 for passing the support 414 at positions corresponding to the supports 414 provided on the front decoration movable member 411. Each rectangular opening member 422 is provided with a slide pin engagement member 422 a so as to face the opening, and is engaged with the slide pin 424. Each slide pin engaging member 422 a is screwed in a screw hole 419 and fixed to the decorative base member 420. Each slide pin engagement member 422 is a support member of the decorative base member 420 with respect to the slide pin 424 together with the support 414.

  Each rectangular opening member 422 restricts the operating range (sliding range) of the support 414, thereby restricting the operating range of the front left decoration movable member 411 a and the front right decoration movable member 411 b and also operating the front decoration movable member 411. Regulate the direction.

  Further, the decorative base member 420 is provided with restricting openings 421a and 421b through which the connecting member 432 (see FIG. 13) can pass and which restricts the moving direction of the connecting member. The restriction openings 421a and 421b are formed in a pair at symmetrical positions with respect to the center of the cam plate 433 (see FIGS. 13 and 14). Further, the restriction openings 421a and 421b are formed in parallel with the rectangular opening member 422 in the length direction.

  The restriction opening 421 restricts the rotational movement of the connecting member 432 in synchronization with the rotation of the cam plate 433 and allows only reciprocating linear movement in the oblique direction. That is, the restriction opening 421 restricts the operation of the front decoration movable member 411 only in a predetermined direction via the connection member 432.

  The rectangular opening member 422 and the restriction opening 421 may be formed in a curved shape, which allows the front decoration movable member 411 to reciprocate on the curved line. In this case, the slide pin 424 can exert the same action (operate only in a certain direction) as the above-described slide pin 424 by using a shape capable of following a curvilinear operation or a bendable material such as resin.

  In addition, the rectangular opening member 422 and the restriction opening 421 have a width in the rotation direction of the cam plate 433 so that the front decoration movable member 411 can move not only in the linear direction but also in a plurality of planar directions. You may form. By this, the operation mode of the front decoration movable member 411 can be made wide, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  FIG. 13 is a front view of the rotary decorative member 430 when the connection member 432 of the first embodiment is located in the recess of the infinite guide groove 434, and FIG. 14 is a protrusion of the infinite guide groove 434. It is a front view of rotation decoration member 430 in case it is located in.

  The rotating decoration member 430 includes a fixing member 435 fixed to the shaft 443 (see FIG. 7). An infinite guide groove 434 for guiding a guide member 432 a of the connecting member 432 is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the fixing member 435, and a pair of fins 431 is formed at symmetrical positions outside the infinite guide groove 434. The infinite guide groove 434 is integral with the fixing member 435 to form a cam plate 433. That is, the cam plate 433, the infinite guide groove 434, the fixed member 435, and the fins 431 function as movable objects.

  In addition, the rotary decorative member 430 is engaged with the infinite guide groove 434 by a guide member 432 a provided at one end of the connection member 432.

  The infinite guide groove 434 is a four-fold symmetrical annular groove in which the concave portion and the convex portion are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees, the distance from the central portion of the cam plate 433 in the concave portion becomes short The distance from the center of 433 becomes longer.

  That is, when the guide member 432 a is in the recess of the infinite guide groove 434, the connection member 432 is located at a short distance from the center, and when the guide member 432 a is in the protrusion of the infinite guide groove 434, The connecting member 432 is located at a long distance from the center.

  The guide member 432a can slide on the infinite guide groove 434, but the restriction opening 421 restricts the movement of the connecting member 432 only to the reciprocating linear movement in the oblique direction. Viewed in the same direction from the center of the cam plate 433 without rotating in synchronization with the rotation of the cam plate 433. Therefore, when the cam plate 433 is rotated, the guide member 432a is guided by the infinite guide groove 434 while being restricted in movement in the rotational direction and continuously slides in the concave and convex portions, thereby providing an oblique direction in a front view Reciprocate to Then, the front decoration movable member 411 reciprocates continuously to the left and right through the guide member 432a (via the connection member 432). Since the endless guide groove 434 is provided with four concave portions and four convex portions, when the cam plate 433 rotates once, the front decoration movable member 411 reciprocates four times.

  The cam plate 433 also rotates the fins 431 fixed to the outer periphery of the infinite guide groove 434. Therefore, the fins 431 and the front decoration movable member 411 can be operated by the driving force of the motor 441.

  FIG. 15 is a front view of the first base member 440 of the first embodiment. The structure shown here is only the first base member 440, and the second base member 449, the rotating decoration member 430, the decoration base member 420, and the front decoration movable member 411 are not included.

  The first base member 440 is a gate-shaped base member to which the rotating decoration member 430, the decoration base member 420, and the front decoration movable member 411 are attached. Each side of the first base member 440 is an upper side 440 a, a left side 440 b, and a right side 440 d.

  A shaft portion 443 for pivotally supporting the rotary decorative member 430 is formed at the central portion of the upper side portion 440 a, and a gear 442 is provided on the left side of the shaft portion 443. Further, a motor 441 is provided on the left of the gear 442, and a gear 441 a axially mounted on the motor 441 is engaged with the gear 442. The gear 442 is also engaged with a gear (not shown) provided at the base of the shaft portion 443. Therefore, the driving force of the motor 441 is supplied to the shaft portion 443 via the gear 442, and when the shaft portion 443 rotates, the cam plate 433 fixed to the shaft portion 443 rotates. Then, when the cam plate 433 rotates, as described above, the front decoration movable member 411 and the fins 431 which are the first movable part 410a integrally perform the movable effect and the light emission effect.

  The ring-shaped member fitted to the bottom of the shaft portion 443 is formed with a rib 443a that blocks the detection light of the sensor 445, and detects whether or not the shaft portion 443 is in the initial position.

  Further, the upper side portion 440a is provided with a biasing member 446, which assists the return of the first movable role unit 410 moved (dropped) from the initial position to the lower operating position to the initial position.

  A motor 449 is disposed on the left side portion 440b, and the motor 449 supplies driving force for returning (returning) to the initial position to the upper side portion 440a moved (falled) to the operation position.

  A right movable member 444 movable in the vertical direction is provided below the right side portion 440d. The right side movable member 444 is capable of performing a drop effect of moving downward in synchronization with the operation of the front surface decoration movable member 411 and the rotary decoration member 430.

  As described above, the driving force for operating the plurality of movable members (the front decoration movable member 411 and the fins 431) constituting the first movable part 410a is supplied by the motor 441 disposed on the first base member 440. Be done. That is, since the first movable part 410a consisting of a plurality of movable members including the front decoration movable member 411 and the fins 431 is supplied with a driving force by one drive source, the drive source is disposed for each movable member. The drive source is reduced compared to the case of FIG.

  The front decoration movable member 411 may be supported only by the connection member 432 without using the support 414. In this case, the front decoration movable member 411 is supported not by the decoration base member 420 but by the infinite guide groove 434.

[One Embodiment of First Embodiment (Cam and Front Decoration Movable Member)]
The following gaming machines can be mentioned as gaming machines having the configuration relating to the first movable role thing 410a described so far.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, an image display unit including a liquid crystal display or the like is provided on a game board in which a game area is formed, and a predetermined game is played on the display device. There is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player.

  As such a game machine, by transmitting the driving force from the drive motor through a plurality of gears and arms, the movable role unit is rotated and moved to the front of the display device, and the effect execution state and the non-effect state A gaming machine that can be converted to a running state is provided (e.g., Patent Document X).

JP, 2015-107157, A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when moving the movable role unit to the front of the display device, the drive source (motor) is disposed for each movable member, and the drive source and the power transmission mechanism (gear The placement space of) was large. In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the components constituting the gaming machine may be affected by the high manufacturing cost and heat generation from the drive source.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which drives a plurality of movable members with a small number of drive sources and operates the movable part to improve the interest of the game.

  (1) In a gaming machine including a movable role operable in response to a predetermined effect and a drive source for supplying a driving force to the movable portion, a groove portion formed on an outer edge of the movable role; And a movable member disposed on the front side of the movable part, the movable member being engageable with the coupling member, and the movable member being engageable with the coupling member via the coupling member. A game machine characterized by being operable by transmitting driving force from a driving source.

  (2) A decoration plate having a restriction opening for restricting the moving direction of the connection member only in a predetermined linear direction is further provided, the decoration plate is disposed between the movable part and the movable member, and the connection member The game machine according to (1), which is inserted into the restriction opening and linearly reciprocates.

  (3) The gaming machine according to (2), wherein the movable member is composed of a plurality of movable members, and the plurality of movable members repeat separation and contact due to rotation of the movable part.

  According to the invention of (1), since the operation of the movable part (cam plate 433) and the movable member (front decoration movable member 411) is covered by one drive source, the drive source is arranged for each movable member. The driving source is reduced compared to the case.

  According to the invention of (2), since the movement direction of the movable member is limited to linear reciprocation by the restriction opening 421a provided in the decoration plate (the decoration base member 420), other structures around the movable member It becomes easy to arrange.

  According to the invention of (3), the movable member is composed of a plurality of movable members (the front left decoration movable member 411a and the front right decoration movable member 411b), and each movable member repeats separation and contact. It can provide a presentation that makes your eyes enjoyable.

[2nd movable role thing]
FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the second movable service unit 500 of the first embodiment. The second movable combination 500 provided in the second movable combination unit 500 mainly performs up and down movement effects of the lifting and lowering unit 510 (see FIG. 17), rotation effects of the left and right arms 505, rotation effects of the propeller 501, and the like. It consists of a light emission effect of the component members. The second movable part 500a can move up and down with the lower side of the display device 41 as an initial position and the front center of the display device 41 as an operation position.

  The second movable part unit 500 includes a base unit 540 including a rear base member 530, an inner base member 520, a front fixing member 504, and a lower fixing member (front cover) 547, an elevating base member 515, and a pair of arms. And 505, an elevation unit 510 configured of the front decoration member 502, the propeller 501, and the like. Although the basic unit 540 and the lifting unit 510 in the initial position can not be viewed in a front view by the gaming board 30, the lifting unit 510 in the operating position is moved to the front of the display device 41 not overlapping the gaming board 30 Jump in front of the player's line of sight.

  The rear base member 530 is provided with a plurality of gears 531, 532, 533 and a rack guide 534 as drive members for moving the lifting unit 510 up and down. The back surface base member 530 is a member serving as a base of the second movable service unit 500, and is attached to the lower center of the base member 601 (see FIGS. 6 and 30) of the third movable service unit 600.

  The middle base member 520 is provided with a motor 522 for supplying a driving force to the lifting unit 510 and a lifting guide groove 521 for guiding the movement of the lifting unit 510, and is attached to the rear base member 530.

  The front fixing member 504 is attached to the middle base member 520 and the back base member 530 by sandwiching the elevating base member 515 with the middle base member 520. Specifically, the screw holes of the front surface fixing member 504 are screwed correspondingly to the screw holes 537, 538 formed in the rear surface base member 530 and the screw holes 527, 528 formed in the inner surface base member 520. .

  The lower fixed member (front cover) 547 supports the second movable accessory unit 500 so as not to tilt forward, and is attached to the middle surface base member 520.

  The elevation base member 515 is a member for supporting the elevation unit 510, and can move up and down with the elevation of the rack 517 provided on the elevation base member 515. The rack 517 is accommodated in the rack guide 534. The rack 517 supports the elevating base member 515 in the vertical direction by engaging with the upper driven gear 533 (see FIG. 18) provided on the back surface base member 530. However, since the lift base member 515 is in an unstable state supported by only one leg of the rack 517 as it is, the guide pin 518 (see FIG. 18) is guided by the lift guide groove 521, and the rear base member The lateral movement of the lifting base member 515 is restricted relative to 530.

  The projecting rotational guide members 508 (see FIG. 18) of the arms 505 are correspondingly inserted into the pair of rotational guide members 516 (guide grooves) provided on the elevating base member 515, and the rotational movement of the arm 505 is performed. Along with guiding, the rotation width is regulated. A pair of upper locking portion 515 a and lower locking portion 515 b for locking the elastic member 509 (torsion spring) is provided on the upper portion of the rotation guide member 516.

  Further, a motor 512 for driving the propeller 501 is attached to the elevating base member 515. A worm 513 is rotatably mounted on the output shaft of the motor 512, and the worm 513 is engaged with the worm wheel 514. The tip of the axis of the worm wheel 514 penetrates the front decoration member 502 and is connected to the propeller 501.

  The pair of arms 505 is attached to the elevating base member 515 by inserting the support portion 515 c of the elevating base member 515 into the supported portion 506. The arm 505 rotates the end upward by the biasing of the elastic member 509 with the supported portion 506 as a shaft. The arm 505 has a predetermined range overlapping with the front decorative member 502 with the supported portion 506 as an axis, so the overlapping portion is not decorated (non-decorative portion), and the decoration is other than the overlapping portion It has been subjected.

  The front decorative member 502 is attached to the elevating base member 515 by sandwiching the non-decorative portion of the arm 505 with the elevating base member 515. At the lower part of the front decorative member 502, as described later, a movable wiring fixing member 503 is provided to cope with the deflection and the elongation of the elevating unit wiring 545 (see FIG. 25).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the second movable service unit 500 when the second movable service 500a is at the initial position will be described. FIG. 17 is a front view of the second movable service unit 500 with the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment in the initial position. FIG. 18 is the same rear view except for the back surface base member 530 and the middle surface base member.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the second movable part 500a is at the initial position, the lifting unit 510 is lowered to the lower limit, and the pair of arms 505 are horizontally positioned so as to extend the arms substantially straightly. ing.

  When the second movable service unit 500 in the initial position is viewed from the back, as shown in FIG. 18, the projecting rotation guide member 508 contacts the inner end of the arc-shaped guide groove of the rotation guide member 516. At the same time, the horizontal state of the arm 505 is maintained. Further, the rack 517 is lowered to the lower limit, and the shielding rib 536 provided on the rack 517 intercepts the detection light of the sensor 535, whereby it is detected that the elevating unit 510 is at the initial position.

  The drive gear 531 pivotally attached to the output shaft of the motor 522 is engaged with the lower driven gear 532, and the lower driven gear 532 is further engaged with the upper driven gear 533 to drive the motor 522 by the upper driven gear 533. Transmit to The upper driven gear 533 is further engaged with the rack 517 to transmit the driving force of the motor 522 to the rack 517.

  That is, the motor 522, the drive gear 531, the lower driven gear 532, the upper driven gear 533, and the rack 517 constitute a drive mechanism of the elevating unit 510. The drive gear 531, the lower driven gear 532, and the upper driven gear 533 are all supported by the rear base member 530.

  Subsequently, the support of the arm 505 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front view of the second movable service unit 500 excluding the front decorative member 502 in the state where the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment is in the initial position. Moreover, FIG. 20 is the same rear view except for the rear base member 530.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the arm 505 is supported by the supported portion 506 on the elevating base member 515.

  The elastic member 509 is a member that biases the arm 505 to pivot outward with the lower engaged portion 509b as a fulcrum, and is, for example, a torsion spring formed of a metal wire. However, when the lifting unit 510 is in the initial position, the second guide member 507 b abuts on the restricting portion 504 a of the front surface fixing member 504, and the horizontal rotation of the arm 505 is suppressed. The elastic member 509 is locked to the upper locking portion 515a at the upper locked portion 509a formed into a circular wire. Further, the elastic member 509 is locked to the lower locking portion 515 b at the lower locked portion 509 b. Furthermore, the elastic member 509 is engaged with the first guide member 507 a provided on the arm 505 at the action portion 509 c in which the wire is formed into an ellipse. The action portion 509c is formed with a width in the length direction in which the first guide member 507a can slide.

  FIG. 20 illustrates a state in which the second movable part 500a is in the initial position, including the mid-surface base member 520, in contrast to FIG.

  A guide pin 518 provided on the elevation base member 515 is engaged with the elevation guide groove 521 formed in the middle surface base member 520. The elevating guide groove 521 is formed to have a length direction in the vertical direction, restricts the moving range of the elevating base member 515 in the vertical direction, restricts the movement in the lateral direction, and guides elevating of the elevating base member 515. When the second movable part 500 a is in the initial position, the guide pin 518 is located at the lower limit of the elevation guide groove 521 and abuts on the lowermost portion of the elevation guide groove 521.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the second movable service unit 500 when the second movable service 500a is in the operating position will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the second movable service unit 500 with the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment in the operating position. FIG. 22 is the same rear view except for the back surface base member 530 and the middle surface base member 520. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the driving force of the motor 522 (see FIG. 16) is transmitted and the rack 517 is pushed upward, the elevating unit 510 is raised.

  When the second movable part 500a is in the operating position, the lifting unit 510 is raised to the upper limit, and the pair of arms 505 have their ends extended in such a way as to extend the arms obliquely upward by the biasing of the elastic member 509. It is pivoted upward. As the lifting and lowering unit 510 is lifted, the lifting and lowering unit 510 becomes visible in a front view.

  When the second movable service unit 500 in the operating position is viewed from the back, as shown in FIG. 22, the pivoting guide member 508 abuts against the outer end of the arc-shaped guide groove of the pivoting guide member 516 The operating state (rotational state) of 505 is maintained.

  Further, since the shielding rib 536 also moves as the rack 517 is lifted, and the detection light of the sensor 535 is not shielded, it is detected that the elevating unit 510 is in the operating position.

  Subsequently, support and rotation operations of the arm 505 will be described. FIG. 23 is a front view of the second movable service unit 500 excluding the front decorative member 502 in a state where the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment is in the operating position. Moreover, FIG. 24 is the same rear view except the back surface base member 530. As shown in FIG.

  The front fixing member 504 is a member having a shape having wings on the left and right, and is a member that restricts and releases the rotation of the arm 505. Of the outer peripheral portion of the wing portion, the inner vertical portion is a restricting portion 504 a that prevents the pivoting of the arm 505. And the part extended diagonally upwards from the control part 504a to the highest position of the front surface fixing member 504 among the outer peripheral parts of a wing | feather part is the releasing part 504b which releases or converges rotation of the arm 505.

  When the elevating base member 515 is raised, the second guide member 507b is raised along the restricting portion 504a, but the second guide member 507b extends in the lateral direction while the second guide member 507b abuts on the restricting portion 504a. Thus, the arm 505 maintains its horizontal state. Then, when the second guide member 507b ascends to the release portion 504b, the second guide member 507b spreads outward according to the width of the release portions 504b, and the arm 505 is supported by the spread of the second guide member 507b. It pivots upward about the part 506.

  On the other hand, when the elevating base member 515 is lowered, the second guide member 507b moves downward along the oblique side of the release portion 504b, so it narrows inward according to the width of the release portions 504b, and the second guide member 507b In response to the narrowing of the arm 505, the arm 505 turns to the horizontal state.

  As described above, it is the elastic member 509 that supplies the pivoting force for pivoting the arm 505 outward, so that the first guide member 507 a provided on the arm 505 in the action portion 509 c always spreads outward. Be driven.

  FIG. 24 illustrates a state in which the second movable part 500a is in the operating position including the mid-surface base member 520, in contrast to FIG.

  When the arm 505 rotates, the rotation guide member 508 abuts on the outer end of the arc-shaped guide groove of the rotation guide member 516 to hold the operating state of the arm 505.

  When the second movable part 500a is in the operating position, the guide pin 518 (see FIG. 20) is located at the upper limit of the elevation guide groove 521 and abuts on the top of the elevation guide groove 521. As the guide pin 518 abuts on the top of the elevation guide groove 521, the elevation of the elevation base member 515 is stopped.

  Next, the lifting unit wiring 545 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28. FIG. FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the second movable service unit 500 in which the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment is in the initial position, and FIG. 26 is a side view thereof.

  The lifting unit wiring 545 is a wiring for supplying power to the lifting unit 510, and one end thereof is connected to the main power supply line which runs the lower part of the control base unit 400, and the other end is an illumination source provided in the lifting unit 510 In order to supply the electric power to the motor and the like, the movable wiring fixing member 503 is drawn to the inside of the elevating unit 510 through the movable wiring fixing member 503.

  The movable wiring fixing member 503 is a rectangular member, and one end (attachment end) of the movable wiring fixing member 503 is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front decoration member 502, and the other end (rotation end) A passage hole 503 a for passing the wire 545 is formed.

  When the lifting unit 510 is in the initial position (lower limit position), the movable wiring fixing member 503 is pivoted upward by the deflection of the lifting unit wiring 545. In addition, when the lifting unit 510 is in the initial position, the lifting unit wiring 545 is bent forward, but the lower space of the second movable service unit 500 divided by the restricting member 547 a of the lower fixing member 547. The lower fixing member 547 is restricted from projecting forward relative to the restricting member 547 a of the lower fixing member 547.

  The lifting unit wiring 545 may be a simple electric wire, but as described in FIG. 38, even the electric wire (wiring) guided so as to be covered by a highly flexible plastic material (wiring guide member 641) Good. The wire may be coated.

  FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the second movable service unit 500 in which the second movable product 500a of the first embodiment is in the operating position, and FIG. 28 is a side view thereof.

  As the lifting unit 510 rises to the operating position (upper limit position), the movable wiring fixing member 503 pivots downward due to the weight of the lifting unit wiring 545. Since the movable wiring fixing member 503 is pivoted downward, the rising amount of the other end of the lifting unit wiring 545 can be suppressed smaller than the rising amount of the lifting unit 510.

  The movable wiring fixing member 503 is turned up and down according to the position of the raising and lowering unit 510 due to the bending and weight of the raising and lowering unit wiring 545, and therefore the other end of the raising and lowering unit wiring 545 is raised or lowered. The load applied to the lifting unit wiring 545 can be reduced by raising and lowering with a width smaller than the lifting width of the unit 510.

  In addition, since the acceleration and impact accompanying the rapid rise, stop, and descent of the lifting and lowering unit 510 are absorbed by the rotation of the movable wiring fixing member 503, the load on the connection portion of the other end of the lifting and lowering unit wiring 545 is reduced. Thus, it is possible to suppress the disconnection and disconnection of the lifting unit wiring 545.

  As described above, the movable wiring fixing member 503 reduces the elevating width of the elevating unit wiring 545 compared to the case where the elevating unit wiring 545 is directly fixed to the elevating unit 510, and the elevating unit wiring 545 Acceleration and shock are reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the lifting unit wiring 545 can be reduced, and disconnection of the connecting portion of the lifting unit wiring 545 and disconnection of the lifting unit wiring 545 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the movement of the elevating unit wiring 545 is contained in a predetermined range by the movable wiring fixing member 503, interference of the elevating unit wiring 545 with other members can be prevented.

One Embodiment of First Embodiment (Movable Wiring Fixing Member)
The following gaming machines can be mentioned as gaming machines having the configuration relating to the movable wiring fixing member 503 described so far.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, an image display unit including a liquid crystal display or the like is provided on a game board in which a game area is formed, and a predetermined game is played on the display device. There is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player.

  As such a game machine, by transmitting the driving force from the drive motor through a plurality of gears and arms, the movable role unit is rotated and moved to the front of the display device, and the effect execution state and the non-effect state A gaming machine that can be converted to an execution state is provided (e.g., Patent Document Y).

JP, 2014-117417, A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when moving the movable part unit to the front of the display device, the substrate for controlling the movable part unit etc. and the wiring connected to the driving source are movable parts. There was a risk of damage due to the effects of movement. Further, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the drive source is disposed for each movable member, the high manufacturing cost and the heat generation from the drive source may affect the parts constituting the game machine.

  Above all, the wiring drawn into the movable member has a risk of breaking (including breakage in the covering portion) or dropping out while repeating pulling and bending along with the operation of the movable member.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the wiring is not damaged in operating the movable part.

  (4) In a gaming machine provided with a movable combination operable according to a predetermined effect, a drive mechanism for operating the movable combination and a wire connectable to the movable combination from the outside of the movable combination And a movable wiring fixing member rotatably attached to the movable part, and the movable wiring fixing member is rotatable in accordance with the operation mode of the wiring following the operation of the movable part A gaming machine characterized by having a certain feature.

  (5) The gaming machine according to (4), wherein the movable wiring fixing member is pivoted in the movement direction of the movable part by the bending of the wiring.

  (6) The gaming machine according to (4) or (5), wherein a front cover is provided on the front surface of the wiring, which restricts the wiring from protruding to the front than a predetermined position.

  According to the invention of (4), when the movable wiring fixing member 503 rotates in response to the movement of the wiring, the acceleration, impact, etc. applied to the wiring moving following the movable part (lifting unit 510) The load can be reduced, and breakage or disconnection of the wiring can be suppressed.

  According to the invention of (5), the wiring can be raised and lowered with a width smaller than the lifting width of the movable part (lifting and lowering unit 510), the load on the wiring is reduced, and the breakage and removal of the wiring are suppressed. Can.

  According to the invention of (6), since the movement of the wiring is contained in the predetermined range by the front cover (lower fixing member 547), the wiring can be prevented from interfering with other members. By this, it is possible to prevent in advance the wiring from breaking due to the wiring interfering with other members.

Another Example of First Embodiment (Movable Wiring Fixing Member)
FIG. 29 is a side view of the second movable service unit 500 in which the second movable product 500a is in the operating position, for explaining another example of the first embodiment.

  Since the game board 30 and the stage unit 40b are located in front of the second movable role unit 500, when the second movable role 500a is in the initial position, except for a part of the upper part of the lifting and lowering unit 510, The lifting unit 510 is hidden by the game board 30 and the stage unit 40b in a front view.

  On the other hand, when the second movable part 500a is in the operating position, most of the elevating unit 510 is visible in front view. Here, it is desirable that the elevator unit wire 545 and the passage hole 503 a should not be viewed by the player.

  The line of sight A shown in FIG. 29 is the line of sight of the player reaching the second movable character unit 500, and the movable wiring fixing member 503 is provided if the movable wiring fixing member 503 is not rotated downward. When the lifting unit wiring 545 is directly pulled into the lifting unit 510 without being driven, it is shown that a part of the lifting unit wiring 545 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the line of sight B is a line of sight intercepted by the stage portion 40b, and for the lifting unit wiring 545 and the passage hole 503a on the extension of the line of sight B, the movable wiring fixing member 503 is rotated downward. The position of the end is lowered, which hinders the view.

  As described above, since the lead-in portion of the elevating unit wiring 545 is pushed downward by the downward rotation of the movable wiring fixing member 503, not only the load on the elevating unit wiring 545 is reduced but also the player visually recognizes It is possible to hide from

  In addition, since the stage portion 40 b may be formed of a translucent member, when the lifting unit 510 is in the operating position, the lifting unit wiring 545 and the passage hole 503 a can be prevented from being viewed only by the game board 30. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, a member movable in moving the second movable part unit 500 to the operating position is provided in the second movable part unit 500, and the movable member fixing member 503 through the movable unit wiring 545 and passage by the movable member The hole 503a may be concealed.

  In addition, between the game board 30 and the second movable role unit 500, a movable additional function (liquid crystal, segment, with LED may be provided) may be additionally provided on the front side of the display device 41. The movable wiring fixing member 503 or the elevating unit wiring 545 and the passage hole 503a may be concealed by the additional movable part. In this case, the lifting unit wiring 545 does not exceed the additionally provided movable part.

[Another embodiment of the first embodiment (movable wiring fixing member)]
The following gaming machines can be mentioned as gaming machines having another example of the configuration of the movable wiring fixing member 503 described so far.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming machine includes a gaming board having an opening, a movable combination operable from an initial position to an operating position, and a front member disposed on the front side of the movable combination. The movable wiring comprises: a drive mechanism for operating the goods; a wire connectable to the movable goods from the outside of the movable goods; and a movable wiring fixing member rotatably attached to the movable goods. The fixed member is rotatable in accordance with the operation mode of the wire following the operation of the movable part, and the wire is the front surface member by the rotating operation of the movable wire fixed member when viewed from the front. A gaming machine characterized by not exceeding.

  (8) The gaming machine according to (7), wherein the movable wiring fixing member is pivoted in the movement direction of the movable member by the bending of the wiring.

  (9) The gaming machine according to (7) or (8), wherein a front cover is provided on the front surface of the wiring, which restricts the wiring from protruding to the front than a predetermined position.

  According to the invention of (7), when the movable wiring fixing member 503 is rotated along with the movement of the wiring, the load applied to the wiring is reduced, and the breakage or removal of the wiring is suppressed. Then, even if the movable part (lifting and lowering unit 510) moves to a position where it can be sufficiently viewed by the player, the passing hole 503a is hidden by the stage unit 40e, so the passing hole 503a and the wiring are visible to the player It is not possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game caused by the player visually recognizing the wiring.

  According to the invention of (8), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the visual recognition of the wiring by the player, and to elevate the wiring with a width smaller than the elevation width of the movable character (lifting unit 510). Thus, the load on the wiring can be reduced, and breakage or disconnection of the wiring can be suppressed.

  According to the invention of (9), since the movement of the wiring is kept within a predetermined range by the front cover (the lower fixing member 547) by suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game due to the wiring being viewed by the player. Interference with other members can be prevented. By this, it is possible to prevent in advance the wiring from breaking due to the wiring interfering with other members.

[3rd movable role thing]
FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the third movable service unit 600 of the first embodiment. The third movable part 600 a provided in the third movable part unit 600 is a movable part that moves the outer edge of the display device 41 as an initial position and the front of the display device 41 as an operating position. The third movable part 600 a is constituted by the upper right movable member 610 and the lower left movable member 620.

  The third movable part product unit 600 is configured by attaching the upper right movable member 610, the lower left movable member 620, and a drive system member for supplying a driving force thereto to the third movable part product base member 601.

  The third movable character base member 601 is a substantially rectangular base member, and the lower 1⁄4 is a portion to which a member of the drive system is attached and there is no possibility of being viewed from the player, so no decoration is given. . The upper 3/4 has a rectangular opening at the center so that the display screen of the display device 41 is not hidden, and the periphery of the opening is decorated. Among the four sides forming the opening, guide grooves for guiding the third movable part 600 a are provided on the upper side 601 a, the left side 601 b, and the lower side 601 c.

  A rod-shaped support body 603 projecting forward is formed at the lower part of the right side 601 d of the third movable part product base member 601, and the support body 603 is inserted into the inserted portion 613 to pivot the upper right movable member 610. Support.

  The upper right movable member 610 is supported by the inserted portion 613 and the guide pin 612 on the third movable part base member 601, and the driving force of the motor 615 causes the engaged portion 613 to be an axis from the upper right of the display device 41. The display device 41 is pivoted to the front. The guide pin 612 is engaged with a guide groove 602 formed with a circular arc on the right side of the upper side 601 a.

  The lower left movable member 620 is supported by the third movable part base member 601 by the guide pins 622 and the guide pins 623 (see FIG. 32), and the front of the display device 41 from the outer peripheral lower left portion of the display device 41 by the driving force of the motor 633. Turn to The guide pin 622 is engaged with a guide groove 604 formed with a circular arc in the middle of the left side 601 b, and the guide pin 623 is formed in the guide groove 605 formed horizontally on the left side of the lower side 601 c. It is engaged through the guide groove 631.

  One end of a drive arm 616 is axially attached to the output shaft of the motor 615, and a guide pin 617 is provided at the other end of the drive arm 616. The guide pin 617 is engaged with the guide groove 611 formed in the lower portion of the upper right movable member 610, and transmits the driving force of the motor 615 to the upper right movable member 610 by the link mechanism, thereby turning the upper right movable member 610 left and right. Move it. A drive system right front cover 816 is attached to the front of the motor 615.

  A semicircular drive gear 634 is rotatably mounted on the output shaft of the motor 633, and the semicircular drive gear 634 is engaged with the driven gear 635. The driven gear 635 is engaged with a semicircular driven gear 636 provided at one end of the pivoting arm 630, and transmits the driving force of the motor 633 to the pivoting arm 630. The guide groove 631 provided at the other end of the pivoting arm 630 transmits the pivoting force of the pivoting arm 630 to the lower left movable member 620 via the guide pin 623.

  The motor 633, the semicircular drive gear 634, the driven gear 635, the semicircular driven gear 636, and the pivoting arm 630 constitute a drive mechanism.

  A drive system left front cover 637 is attached to the front surface of the semicircular drive gear 634, the driven gear 635, and the semicircular driven gear 636, and supports the above three gears from the front side.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the third movable service unit when the third movable product 600a of the first embodiment is in the initial position, and FIG. 32 is a rear view of the same.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the drive arm 616 is pivoted to the left by the driving force of the motor 615, the guide pin 617 pivots below the shaft portion (inserted portion 613) of the upper right movable member 610 to the left. The to-be-inserted portion 613 turns to the right above the shaft portion as a shaft. Therefore, the upper right movable member 610 is positioned in front of the right side 601 d as an initial position of the third movable role 600 a.

  A shielding rib 614 is formed on the lower side surface of the upper right movable member 610, and when the upper right movable member 610 is in the initial position, the detection light of the sensor 606 is blocked by the shielding rib 614. Is detected to be in the initial position.

  When the pivoting arm 630 is pivoted to the left by the driving force of the motor 633, the guide pin 623 attracts the lower left movable member 620 to the lower left portion of the opening. Is located in front of the left side 601b as a whole.

  A shielding rib 632 is formed on the casing of the semicircular driven gear 636, and when the lower left movable member 620 is in the initial position, the detection light of the sensor 607 is blocked by the shielding rib 632 and thus the lower left movable member It is detected that 620 is in the initial position.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the third movable service unit when the third movable product 600a of the first embodiment is in the operating position, and FIG. 34 is a rear view of the same.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the drive arm 616 pivots to the right by the driving force of the motor 615, the guide pin 617 pivots below the shaft portion (inserted portion 613) of the upper right movable member 610 to the right. The to-be-inserted portion 613 turns to the left above the shaft portion as a shaft. Therefore, the upper right movable member 610 is positioned at the upper right of the opening (that is, of the display device 41) of the opening of the third movable prize base member 601 as the operation position of the third movable prize 600a.

  Further, when the pivoting arm 630 is pivoted to the right by the driving force of the motor 633, the guide pin 623 pivots the lower left movable member 620 to the right. 620 is located at the lower left of the front of the opening of the third movable product base member 601 (that is, of the display device 41).

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the operating position, the guide pin 612 slides near the left limit of the guide groove 602. Also, the guide pin 622 slides near the lower limit of the guide groove 604, and the guide pin 623 slides near the right limit of the guide groove 605.

  The upper right movable member 610 and the lower left movable member 620 interlock with each other to rotate from the initial position to the operating position, and both members interlock with each other to rotate from the operating position to the initial position. It may rotate.

  Subsequently, the lower left movable member wiring 640 for supplying power to the lower left movable member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35 is a front view of the third movable part unit 600 when the third movable part 600 a of the first embodiment is in the initial position, and FIG. 36 is a front view in the same operating position. is there. In both FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the lower left movable member wiring 460 is indicated by a thick line. FIG. 37 is an enlarged front view of the lower left movable member 620 and the drive system left front cover 637 according to the first embodiment.

  The upper right movable member 610 and the lower left movable member 620 are both movable members imitating a dragon, and are provided with an illumination source inside. Among these, in the upper right movable member 610, a wire for supplying power is disposed on the back side.

  To the lower left movable member 620, a lower left movable member wiring 640 shown by thick lines in FIGS. 35 and 36 is disposed, and power is supplied from the control base unit 400 side to the lower left movable member 620. The lower left movable member wiring 640 is fixed at one end to the lower left side surface of the third movable product base member 601, and is routed along the left side (the back of the dragon) of the outer periphery of the lower left movable member 620. The other end is connected to the inside of the lower left movable member 620 by being wound around 622. The lower left movable member wiring 640 is a wiring that changes (moves) the operation mode following the operation of the lower left movable member 620.

  The lower left movable member wiring 640 is a wiring disposed so as to cover a highly flexible plastic material (wiring guide member 641 described later).

  A wiring guide member 641 to be described later is fixed to the outer peripheral portion of the lower left movable member 620 on the upper side of the fixed boundary portion 624 on the outer peripheral left side (long back of the dragon) of the lower left movable member 620. It can be attached to and detached from the outer periphery.

  As shown in FIG. 36, when the third movable part 600a is in the operating position, the lower left movable member from one end (the third movable part base member 601 side) of the lower left movable member wire 640 to the fixed boundary 624 For the wiring 640, the line develops from the outer peripheral portion of the lower left movable member 620 in a substantially linear manner. The fixed boundary portion 624 to the guide pin 622 form a track along the outer periphery of the lower left movable member 620.

  Therefore, when the lower left movable member 620 reciprocates between the initial position and the operation position, the lower left movable member wiring 640 does not hang down to the front of the display device 41, and the visibility of the display screen is not hindered. In the substantially triangular area defined by the lower left movable member 620, the left side 601b, and the lower side 601c, an area for visually recognizing the display screen as the lower left display area 552 is secured.

  In the enlarged front view of FIG. 37, the wiring first fixed member 626 is removed from the lower left movable member 620 as a member for fixing the lower left movable member wiring 640 to the outer periphery of the lower left movable member 620 above the fixed boundary 624 Is represented.

  The wiring first fixed member 626 is provided at the upper portion of the fixed boundary portion 624 and in the recessed portion of the lower left movable member 620. The wiring first fixed member 626 is fixed to the lower left movable member 620 by screwing the screw hole 626b to the boss 620b and screwing the screw hole 626c to the boss 620c.

  The wiring guide member 641 is inserted into the recessed portion 626d and fixed to the outer periphery of the lower left movable member 620.

  The wiring first fixing member 626 is provided with a band port (passage port) 626a for passing the binding band 643 (see FIG. 38). The wiring first fixing member 626 can also fix the lower left movable member wiring 640 by passing the binding band 643 through the band opening 626a, and fixes the wiring first fixing member 626 by various other fixing methods. it can. The wiring first fixed member 626 is provided in the recessed portion of the lower left movable member 620, whereby a curved portion is formed in the lower left movable member wiring 640, and the curved portion accelerates and collides with the movement of the lower left movable member 620. Can reduce the load on the

  Since a slight space is provided between the wiring first fixed member 626 and the lower left movable member 620, the wiring guide member 641 described later is disposed in the space, and the wiring guide member 641 is fixed.

  In addition, since the wiring guide member 641 is fixed between the wiring first fixed member 626 and the lower left movable member 620, the length to the wiring second fixed member 638 may be sufficient, or the length to the middle of the wiring 640 It may be distributed. That is, as long as the wiring 640 can follow the lower left movable member 620, any length may be used.

  FIG. 38 is an enlarged view of the lower left movable member wiring 640 according to the first embodiment, wherein (A) is a view of a portion where the wiring guide member 641 is bound alternately to the binding band 643 and (B) is the same left side. (C) is a diagram of the part bound on the right side. Moreover, FIG. 39 is an enlarged view of another example of the lower left movable member wiring 640 of the first embodiment, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a side view.

  The lower left movable member wiring 640 is such that the wiring 642 is bound by the binding band 643 to the wiring guide member 641 having a width several times the width of the wiring (conductive wire) 642. The binding band 643 functions as a fixing member and a fixing member of the wire 642. The band opening (passage opening) 626a may be referred to as a closing opening corresponding to the name of the binding band 643.

  The wiring guide member 641 is a translucent and flexible plastic material, and can follow stretching and bending in the front, rear, left, right, and in the length direction. The wire 642 is freely movable in the ring-shaped space formed by the binding band 643 on the upper surface of the wiring guide member 641, and the wiring guide member 641 is a load mainly due to the extension, bending, and impact accompanying the movement of the character. The load on the wire 642 is reduced.

  A plurality of band openings 644 for passing the binding band 643 are formed in the wiring guide member 641 in the length direction (longitudinal direction) of the wiring guide member 641.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, by alternately providing the band openings 644 on the left and right sides of the wiring guide member 641, spaces in which the wirings 642 can move to the left or right are alternately formed, and the wiring for the lower left movable member The load on the wiring 642 can be reduced regardless of whether the wiring 640 is bent to the left or right.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38B, by continuously providing the band opening 644 on the right side of the wiring guide member 641, a space where the conducting wire can move to the left is formed, and the lower left movable member wiring 640 is on the right. The load on the wiring 642 can be reduced even if it is strongly bent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38C, by continuously providing the band opening 644 on the left side of the wiring guide member 641, a space where the conducting wire can move to the right is formed, and the lower left movable member wiring 640 is on the left. The load on the wiring 642 can be reduced even if it is strongly bent.

  The load on the wiring 642 can be effectively reduced by matching the shape of the line of the lower left movable member wiring 640 with how to provide the band openings 644.

  39A and 39B show a state in which a plurality of band openings 644 are also provided in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the length direction of the wiring guide member 641. Since a plurality of band openings 644 are also provided in the lateral direction, for example, the banding band 643 is allowed to pass through the band opening 644 on the left side to bind the banding band 643 via the right outside of the wiring guide member 641; It can be made to pass through band opening 644 on the left side and band opening 644 on the right side and made to bind. In addition, it is also possible to make the band port 644 obliquely pass and bind, and the binding width of the binding band 643 can be arbitrarily adjusted.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of band openings 644 in the lateral direction, the band openings 644 and the binding width may be determined in accordance with the lines of the lower left movable member wiring 640. It is not necessary to form a band port on the left side or the right side together, and it is not necessary to create the wiring guide member 641 as a custom order. That is, the wiring guide member 641 provided with a plurality of band openings 644 also in the lateral direction can be used for general purpose.

  The wire 642 may be a communication wire such as an optical fiber, or a wire for pushing or pulling another structure, and cables in general are assumed. Further, the wiring guide member 641 may be a light guide type member that can be seen to emit light by reflecting light incident from an end portion forward or the like. In this case, the wiring guide member 641 may be composed of, for example, three layers of a reflective sheet, an acrylic sheet, and a diffusion sheet in this order from the lower layer, or it is composed only of an acrylic sheet, and a reflective portion is formed inside the acrylic by laser It may be done. Further, the wiring guide member 541 may contain a fluorescent paint.

  Further, the wiring guide member 641 may cover the wiring 642. That is, a flat cavity is provided in the wiring guide member 641, and the wire 642 is disposed inside the cavity. In this case, since the wire 642 can freely move laterally in the cavity of the wiring guide member 641, the load on the wire 642 can be reduced. Further, when the wiring guide member 641 covers the wiring 642, the wiring guide member 641 may or may not be provided with the band port 644.

One Embodiment of First Embodiment (Wiring Guide Member)
The following gaming machines can be mentioned as gaming machines having the configuration regarding the wiring guide member 641 described so far.

  (10) In a gaming machine provided with a movable combination operable according to a predetermined effect, a drive mechanism for operating the movable combination and a wire connectable to the movable combination from the outside of the movable combination And a wiring guide member by which the wiring is guided, wherein the wiring guide member is disposed along the outer periphery of the movable part, and enables the wiring to follow the movable part that operates. A game machine characterized by

  (11) The gaming machine according to (10), wherein the wiring guide member is a translucent member, and includes a passage port through which binding means capable of binding the wiring can pass.

  (12) The gaming machine according to (11), wherein a plurality of the passage openings are provided in each of the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction of the wiring guide member.

  (13) The gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12), wherein the wiring guide member includes a flat cavity, and the wiring is disposed in the cavity.

  According to the invention of (10), since the wiring is protected by the wiring guide member, damage to the wiring can be suppressed even if the wiring moves, pulls, and bends following the movable part. Further, since the wiring guide member is disposed along the outer periphery of the movable part, the wire is drawn around the outer periphery of the movable part, thereby suppressing extreme tension and bending.

  According to the invention of (11), the wiring is bundled with the wiring guide member by passing the binding band through the band opening. In addition, since the wiring guide member is translucent, it transmits images and decoration light, and does not greatly hinder the player's visual recognition.

  According to the invention of (12), since banding can be performed using a band opening corresponding to a location in anticipation of movement of the wiring, there is no need to prepare a custom-made wiring guide member adapted to the movement of the wiring, A universal wiring guide member is provided that is not constrained by

  According to the invention of (13), since the wiring can be freely moved to the left and right in the cavity of the wiring guide member, the load on the wiring can be reduced. Moreover, since the wiring movable member and the wiring are integrated, it is possible to give a clear impression.

[Display area defined by the wiring guide member when the third movable part is in operation]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 48, effects of the display device 41 interlocked with the third movable service 600a will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the screen display when the third movable service object 600a of the first embodiment is at the initial position, and the variation display game is in the reach state.

  The screen (display screen) of the display device 41 is divided into a central display area 551, a lower left display area 552, an upper left display area 553, an upper right display area 554, a lower right display area 555, and a lower central display area 556.

  In FIG. 40, the variation state of the reach state is displayed in the central display area 551. Further, three start memories are displayed in the lower central display area 556 without distinction between the special view 1 start memory and the special view 2 start memory. Furthermore, a fourth symbol is displayed in the lower left display area 552. The fourth symbol displayed here is displayed as the same function as the lamp display 80, and the display mode may be the same as the lamp display 80 or may be displayed in a different mode.

  FIG. 41 is a view showing an example of the screen display when the third movable service object 600a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and the variable display game is shifted from reach to development effect.

  When the third movable role 600a moves to the operating position, the lower left movable member 620 covers the lower center display area 556, so the start memory display moves to an area near the left side of the display screen, for example, displayed vertically. Ru. The start memory display may represent the number of reservations in numbers. Further, in the central display area 551, a developed image of reach is displayed in a central effect area 551a surrounded by a broken line formed by the third movable character 600a, and an identification pattern of reach mode is displayed in the upper left display area 553.

  Since the lower left display area 552 is not covered by the lower left movable member 620 in the operating state, the lower left display area 552 continues to display the fourth symbol.

  The wiring guide member 641 may emit light to draw attention to the lower left display area 552 partitioned by the lower left movable member 620 and to increase the player's awareness of the fourth symbol. By utilizing the display area defined by the third movable character 600a in the operating position and the third movable character article base member 601 as an appealing area, it becomes possible to provide an unprecedented novel effect. . Hereinafter, various examples of effects displayed in the appeal area will be described in order until FIG. The lower left display area 552 and the upper right display area 554 correspond to the appeal area.

  FIG. 42 is a view showing another example of the screen display when the third movable part 600 a of the first embodiment is in the operating position, and represents the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed in one of the appeal areas A character is displayed.

  Here, a character indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the lower left display area 552, the player is notified of the degree of expectation in the appeal area, and a fourth symbol is displayed in the upper right display area 554, and two appeal areas are displayed. Information is effectively transmitted to the player by utilizing the Note that the character suggesting the expectation and the fourth pattern may be displayed alternately with the display area switched.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing another example of the screen display when the third movable role product 600a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and an icon corresponding to reach effect developed to one appealing area is displayed ing.

  Here, it is displayed in the lower left display area 552 that it is SP1 reach as a reach effect in which the variable display game under execution is developed. Further, a fourth symbol is displayed in the lower right display area 555. When the third movable role 600a is in the operating position, a part of the display screen is covered, but areas where characters and icons can be displayed are left at the four corners of the display screen, and the central effect area 551a When the effect image is displayed, these four corners become effective information transfer areas. The information transmission images (for example, characters, icons, numbers, etc.) displayed in the display areas at these four corners may be interchanged in order or randomly exchanged in their display areas, and may not be displayed randomly or displayed. You may

  FIG. 44 is a view showing another example of the screen display when the third movable part 600a of the first embodiment is in the operating position, and an icon related to a suspended display during fluctuation is displayed in one of the appeal areas There is.

  Here, the start memory of the variable display game being executed is displayed in the lower left display area 552, and changes from the normal display mode (for example, white circles) to notify that the degree of expectation is high. Note that an information transfer image such as the fourth symbol may be displayed in another corner other than the lower left, and an icon related to starting storage being executed may be displayed in the upper right display area 554.

  FIG. 45 is a view showing another example of the screen display when the third movable part 600 a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and the number of starting storages pending is displayed in one of the appeal areas .

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing another example of the screen display when the third movable service object 600a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and is a state where the variable display game is being executed.

  Here, the start storage is divided and displayed in the lower center display area 556 as a special view 1 start store and a special view 2 start store. The start memory indicated by the white circle is the special view 1 start memory, and the start memory indicated by the black circle is the special view 2 start memory. In the lower left display area 552, a starting memory during execution of the variable display game is displayed.

  Further, in the upper right display area 554, the number of special figure 1 start memories is displayed as a numeral “3” on the upper side, and the number of special figure 2 start memories is indicated as “2” on the lower side thereof.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing another example of the screen display when the third movable role product 600a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and is an effect screen that continues from the screen of FIG.

  When the third movable part 600a is moved to the operating position, the lower center display area 556 is covered by the lower left movable member 620, so that the start memory display is moved and displayed near the left side of the display screen.

  In addition, the effect image is displayed in the central effect area 551a, and the identification symbol is moved to the upper left display area 553 and displayed.

  On the other hand, since the upper right display area 554 is not obscured, it becomes an appeal area and continues to display the number of starting memories (the number of reservations).

  Further, in the lower left display area 552, when the lower left movable member 620 moves from the initial position to the operation position, a display mode indicating that the starting memory display under execution shows a high expectation at the moment when there are many hidden It changes and is displayed. In addition, at the timing when the starting memory display being executed changes, a sound effect is notified as "Poyoi".

  As described above, when the third movable part 600a moves from the initial position to the operating position, the image displayed in the appeal area changes at a timing at which it is temporarily obscured by the third movable part 600a. Appeal is possible.

  FIG. 48 is a view showing another example of the screen display when the third movable part 600 a of the first embodiment is in the operation position, and the number of big hits and how to hit are displayed in the appeal area.

  Here, in the central effect area 551a indicated by a broken line, the identification symbol of the variable display game being executed is displayed, and "lower right →" is displayed in the lower left display area 552, and "twice" in the upper right display area 554. And the number of big hits is displayed.

  The indication of “right strike →” informs that the player hitting the right is advantageous for the player, and, for example, before and after changing from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, “← left strike” It is notified that the display changes to the display of "right-hand-on".

  Note that the display of “right strike →” may be displayed in the lower right display area 555 or the upper right display area 554, which is the area on the right side of the display screen, so that the player can intuitively understand.

  Image displayed as information transfer image: start memory number, start memory display being executed, start memory display read ahead, type of reach, expectation, or image suggesting game mode (eg, character or icon), Although the display of the number of times of big hit, right hit or left hit is taken as an example, these images may be displayed in the appeal area in any combination. Also, any combination may be displayed at the four corners. Furthermore, the effect may be performed by combining any of the change in the display mode of the image, the sound effect, and the replacement of the display location according to the passage of the third movable role 600a.

  As described above, since the lower left movable member wiring 640 in the present embodiment can be attached and detached at the fixed boundary 624, the lower left movable member can be moved in spite of movement following the lower left movable member 620. The wiring for wiring 640 does not sag to the front of the display device 41, and does not prevent visual recognition of the screen. Therefore, the area divided by the opening of the third movable product base member 601 and the lower left movable member 620 in the operating position can be used as the appeal area.

  In addition, since the lower left movable member wiring 640 in the present embodiment is fixed to the lower left movable member 620 by the wiring first fixed member 626 provided in the outer peripheral recessed portion of the lower left movable member 620, the shape is synchronized with the recessed portion. The load of tension, bending, and impact accompanying the movement of the lower left movable member 620 can be reduced.

  Further, in the lower left movable member wiring 640 in the present embodiment, since the wiring 642 is guided by the wiring guide member 641, the load on the wiring 642 is reduced. Furthermore, since the wiring guide member 641 is provided with a band port 644 which can be freely bound through the binding band 643 vertically, horizontally and diagonally, the moving space formed by the binding band 643 allows the wiring 642 to be provided. The above load is reduced, and the risk of breakage or breakage is greatly reduced.

  Further, the appeal area is an area where the player's attention is easily gathered, and is combined with the change of the display mode of the image, the sound effect, the replacement of the display location, etc. in the appeal area. By displaying various information transfer images such as characters and icons, it is possible to effectively transmit information on the progress of the game to the player. In addition, an effect of improving the interest of the game can be executed.

[One embodiment of the first embodiment (display area divided by the wiring guide member)]
The following gaming machines can be mentioned as gaming machines having the configuration of the display area divided by the lower left movable member wiring 640 to the lower left movable member 620 described above.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, an image display unit including a liquid crystal display or the like is provided on a game board on which a game area is formed, and a predetermined game is played in the image display unit. There is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value.

  In such a gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the random number value stored corresponding to the start memory is a big hit or not while the start memory is stored in the start memory means and the variable display game is waiting. The game machine provided with a function to execute the pre-reading effect by performing the beam effect by integrating the character and the display screen that are provided on the outer edge of the game board as the frame decoration device. (E.g., Patent Document Z).

JP, 2015-073703, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the accessory provided on the outer edge of the gaming board and the display screen of the display device installed at the opening of the central part of the gaming board are integrated to provide visual effects according to the progress of the game. However, due to the daily progress in the development of gaming machines, obsolescence of the rendering aspect can not be avoided.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of gaming is enhanced.

  (14) In a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable character operable in accordance with the predetermined character, the movable character is operated to the front of the display device The apparatus comprises a drive mechanism, a wire connectable to the movable part from the outside of the movable part, and a wiring guide member by which the wiring is guided, and the wiring guide member is along the outer periphery of the movable part. Are arranged in a straight line so that the wire can follow the movable part moving forward of the display device, and the movable part is in front of the display device by the movable part A game machine characterized in that a divided area to be divided is formed in a screen area of the display device.

  (15) The gaming machine according to (14), wherein an information transmission image for notifying a gaming state can be displayed in the division area.

  (16) The gaming machine according to (14) or (15), wherein information related to the launch of the gaming ball can be displayed in the division area.

  (17) The gaming machine according to any one of (14) to (16), wherein the wiring guide member emits light by incident light which is incident from an end of the wiring guide member.

  (18) The gaming machine according to any one of (14) to (17), wherein the wiring guide member includes a fluorescent paint.

  According to the invention of (14), the load applied to the wiring is reduced by the wiring guide member, and the division region divided by the wiring guide member is formed, thereby providing an effect region which has never been achieved so far. It is possible to improve the interest.

  According to the invention of (15), since the characters and the icons are displayed in the divided area, the degree of attention of the player can be increased, and the game information can be effectively transmitted.

  According to the invention of (16), since right-handed and left-handed are displayed in the division area, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the wasted ball by effectively transmitting how to strike. .

  According to the invention of (17), since the wiring guide member emits light by the light incident from the end, it is possible to provide a fantastic atmosphere around the division area at any timing and to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the invention of (18), since the wiring guide member emits light by the fluorescent paint, it is possible to provide a fantastic rendering environment around the divided area by the contrast of the background screen and the surrounding decoration members by the contrast Can improve the interest of

[Special fluctuation winning equipment]
Next, the structure of the special variation winning device unit 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the special variation winning device unit 700 of the first embodiment, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a plan view. 50 is a perspective view of the special variation winning device unit 700 in the closed state of the opening and closing door 39c of the first embodiment, FIG. 51 is a special variation winning apparatus with the opening and closing door 39c of the first embodiment in the open state FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a unit 700.

  The special variation winning device 39 is a device for alternately converting the open / close door 39c between the closed state and the open state during a predetermined period of the round game period of the special gaming state, and is provided in the special variation winning device unit 700. Further, the special variation winning device unit 700 is provided with one general winning opening 35 capable of winning game balls flowing down from the right side (see FIG. 52).

  As shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 49, the special variation winning device unit 700 has a decorative portion 720 on the front side and a main portion 760 on the rear side with the flange portion 701f of the base member 701 as a boundary. Composed of The decorative portion 720 and the main body portion 760 may be visible to the player or may not be visible to the player, respectively.

  The decorative portion 720 includes a front decorative member 721 having a front surface with a decoration, and an upper side wall 722 formed on top of the front decorative member 721. The front decorative member 721 is internally provided with a flow path for guiding the winning balls that have won the big winning opening or the general winning opening 35 to the back side of the base member 701, and the flow path is formed on the back side of the front decorative member 721. Ru.

  The decorative portion 720 forms a ball passage 724 between itself and the flange portion 701f of the base member 701, and has a winning opening in the middle of the ball passage 724. The ball passage 724 is formed so that the left side is lower than the right side in a front view, and the gaming ball is designed to flow downward from the right side to the left side. An upper side wall 722 formed of a translucent material is provided on the front surface of the ball passage 724, and a game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 is visible.

  The main body 760 is covered by a housing 731 (see FIG. 52) accommodating the base member 701 from the back side and a solenoid cover 771 (see FIG. 52), and is fitted to the game board 30 by the outer peripheral portion of the housing 731.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the main winning opening opens and closes from the main body 760 as the tongue-like member 741 (see FIG. 52) moves forward and backward. The upper surface of the tongue-like member 741 is a flat surface provided with a step, and the tip end side is formed one step lower, and forms an open / close door 39c. In addition, three protuberances (convex parts) 742 are provided on the top end side of the tongue-like member 741 and have a function of weakening the flow-down force of the gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 724. The open / close door 39 c constitutes a part of the bottom of the ball passage 724.

  FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the special variation winning device unit 700 of the first embodiment. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative portion 720 of the first embodiment, (A) is a front view of the base member 701, (B) is a rear view of the front decorative member 721. As shown in FIG. FIG. 54 is a view for explaining the main body 760 of the first embodiment, (A) is a rear view of the base member 701, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the housing 731 and the open / close door unit 740.

  First, the side structure of the ball passage 724 provided between the base member 701 and the upper side wall 722 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 (A), on the surface of the flange-like portion 701f of the base member 701, which corresponds to the back side of the ball passage 724, a corrugated portion which is a small corrugated surface (frictional surface) 701a is provided. The waved portion 701a is a portion where the frictional force formed perpendicularly to the direction along the ball passage 724 is high, and has a function of reducing the flow-down force of the gaming ball abutting on the waved portion 701a.

  Then, on the wavy portion 701 a, a ridge-shaped rear side ridge portion (ridge portion) 702 which is higher than the height of the uneven surface is formed in a direction perpendicular to the direction along the ball passage 724. The back surface side ridge portion 702 is formed in four in a direction along the ball passage 724 with a predetermined interval (pitch). Each shape of the rear side protruding ridge portion 702 is a substantially triangular prism. The angle of the upstream surface 702a facing the upstream side of the ball passage 724 among the surfaces of the rear side ridges 702 rises from the base member 701 at an angle smaller than the downstream surface 702b facing the downstream side of the ball passage 724 The upstream surface 702a has a gentler slope than the downstream surface 702b. Therefore, a peak formed by combining one side of the upstream surface 702a and one side of the downstream surface 702b is located on the left side of the center line in a front view. Thus, the width of the rear surface portion (the base member 701 side) of the rear surface side ridge portion 702 can be made smaller by forming the ridge portion with a steep inclination on the downstream surface 702 b, and the ball passage 724 is more The rear side projecting ridge portion 702 can be provided. It is to be noted that giving the upstream surface 702a a gentler inclination than the downstream surface 702b is to give an appropriate meandering to the gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 724 as described later.

  With this shape, when the gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 724 to the left abuts on the rear side protrusion 702, the gaming ball is rolled in the ball passage 724 in the forward direction (oblique forward direction). Therefore, the rear surface side ridge portion 702 has a function of weakening the flow of the gaming ball than that of the wavy portion 701a by rolling the gaming ball flowing downward in the lateral direction forward. In addition, the rear surface side ridge portion 702 is not only the gaming ball flowing down from the right side (upstream side), but also the gaming ball flowing down to the ball passage 724 from diagonally upward direction or upward direction to the front according to the shape of the left / right asymmetry. It is possible to roll and prevents the game ball from jumping upward from the ball passage 724.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), on the back side of the upper side wall 722 (ie, on the front side of the ball passage 724), it has a bowl shape with a predetermined interval in a direction perpendicular to the direction along the ball passage 724. Three front ridges (ridges) 725 are formed. Although the front side ridges 725 may be formed on the front side facing the rear side ridges 702, the front side ridges 725 are positioned in the middle of the pitch of the rear side ridges 702 in order to give the game ball a zigzag meander. It is formed in the place where

  Each shape of the front-side protrusion portion 725 is also substantially triangular prism-shaped, but the peak portion is formed shorter than the back surface side (upper side surface side). The triangular shape on the bottom side (the large winning opening side) of the triangular prism is formed to be inclined upward from the back side to the peak portion. Furthermore, since the front side ridges 725 are formed slightly above the rear side ridges 702, only the game balls that bounce off the ball passage 724 will abut the rear side ridges 702, in particular It has the function of holding the game ball, which is about to fly upward from the passage 724, in the ball passage 724.

  Therefore, the rear surface side ridge portion 702 and the front surface side ridge portion 725 suppress the game balls which flow down to the ball passage 724 from the upper side or the diagonal upper side from being pushed out to the upper side, and the gaming balls which flow down from the upper side or the diagonal upper side, Make it easier to win the big winning prize. Further, a protruding portion (convex portion) 742 provided at the tip of the tongue-like member 741 and a serrated tongue-like member 741 formed so as to have a notch in a plan view at a position corresponding to the protruding portion 742. In order to irregularly change the flow-down direction of the game ball, the step 743 (depression portion) also suppresses the upward jumping of the game ball flowing down to the ball passage 724 from above or diagonally above, and flows down from above or diagonally Makes it easier to win the game ball in the big winning opening.

  In addition, the rear surface side ridge portion 702 and the front surface side ridge portion 725 weaken the flow of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 and make it easy to win the game ball in the big winning opening. Similarly, the projecting portion (convex portion) 742 and the step 743 also irregularly change the flowing direction of the game ball to weaken the flow of the game ball and make it easy to win the game ball in the big winning opening.

  As described above, the back side protrusion 702, the front protrusion 725, the raised portion 742, and the step 743 can keep the game ball flowing down the ball passage 724 in the ball passage 724 as much as possible. That is, compared to the case where the rear side projection 702, the front projection 725, the projection 742, and the step 743 do not exist, the gaming ball of the first embodiment is more likely to win the winning opening in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Become. That is, the rear side projection 702, the front projection 725, the projection 742 and the step 743 prevent the game ball from jumping out of the ball passage 724, and the game ball passes through the ball passage 724. Functions as a winning aid by increasing the time required for

  And, since the game ball staying in the ball passage 724 falls into the big winning opening at a stroke when the open / close door 39c is in the open state and wins, it brings an advantageous state for the player and greatly improves the interest of the game. be able to. In particular, when a plurality of game balls are staying on the open / close door 39c even with a short opening time of about 0.2 seconds, in order to win a prize, it is compared with a game machine not equipped with the prize assisting means. Greatly improve the fun of gaming.

  Next, the flow path through which the game ball that has won the special variation winning device 39 and the general winning opening 35 passes will be described. The flow path of the general winning opening 35 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 52, an opening 735 facing obliquely upward to the right is formed on the right side of the front decorative member 721 and becomes an opening of the general winning opening 35.

  The gaming ball having passed through the opening 735 flows down the right front flow channel 728 shown in FIG. 53 (B), passes through the base member general winning opening 704, and flows down to the main body 760 side. Further, the winning balls flow down the right rear flow channel 705, pass through the right housing opening 732 formed in the housing 731 and are collected together with the other out balls. A winning opening switch 35 a is provided in the right front flow channel 728, and a game ball winning in the general winning opening 35 is detected.

  As shown by the double-headed arrow "W" in FIG. 53 (B), the special winning opening is formed with an opening toward the upper side, for example, with a width for four game balls. The game ball dropped to the opening passes through the special winning opening switch 35a to flow down the central front flow passage 727, and passes through the base member large winning opening 706 to flow to the main body 760 side. Further, the winning balls flow down the central back flow passage 707, pass through the lower housing opening 733 formed in the housing 731 and are collected together with the other out balls.

  The tongue-like member 741 passes through the base member 701 by passing through the base member tongue-like opening 703 formed in the base member 701, and the front side from the opening 703 functions as the open / close door 39c. The open / close door 39c is opened and closed by the tongue member 741 moving back and forth by the power of the large winning opening solenoid 39b provided in the open / close door unit 740. The open / close door unit 740 is covered by a solenoid cover 771 from the back side, and the large winning opening solenoid 39 b is received by a receiving portion 771 a formed in the housing 771.

  Subsequently, the structure and operation mechanism of the tongue member 741 will be described. FIG. 55 is a view for explaining the structure of the tongue-like member 741 of the first embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view.

  The tongue-like member 741 is a movable member whose front side functions as the open / close door 39c. The front side of the tongue-like member 741 is formed one step lower by the step 743, and a raised portion 742 is formed at the tip of the lower side. The tongue member 741 is formed to be inclined downward to the left in a front view, and allows the gaming ball to flow downward to the left of the ball passage 724 when the open / close door 39c is closed. An engaged portion 741b is formed on the central lower portion of the tongue 741. The engaged portion 741b is engaged with the engagement shaft 749 (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and the power of the large winning opening solenoid 39b is transmitted.

  The step 743 has a saw-tooth shape in plan view, but each depression as the step 743 weakens the flow of the game ball and prevents the so-called ball biting that the game ball completely stops flowing down. It is formed at an obtuse angle with respect to the downflow direction (left direction) without combining only right angles. That is, when the step 743 is formed in a U-shape in which only a right angle is combined with the shape in a plan view, the gaming ball may stop completely in the U-shaped portion to cause generation of a ball bit, A release portion 743a is formed on the front side such that the width of the step 743 is increased so that the game ball flows in the flow-down direction.

  The release portion 743a also has a function of rolling the gaming ball which has flowed down from the right and entered the opening of the step 743 forward (obliquely forward), and is provided at a position corresponding to each opening of the step 743. Along with the part 742, the game ball is given meandering.

  Although the height of the raised portion 742 is made equal to the height of the step 743 in consideration of passing the tongue member 741 to the base member tongue-shaped opening 703, the height of the raised portion 742 is greater than that of the step 743. It may be high or low. The raised portion 742 is a portion where the gaming balls flowing down the ball passage 724 particularly abut, and therefore, the flow height of the gaming balls can be weakened more if the raised height is high. Further, the raised portion 742 may not be a portion that bulges upward with respect to the tongue-like member 741, but may be a depressed portion that gently sinks downward.

  FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the open / close door unit 740 for explaining the operation of the tongue-like member 741 of the first embodiment in the front-rear direction, wherein (A) shows the tongue-like member 741 advanced, (B) Is a view showing a state in which the tongue-like member 741 moves backward. FIG. 57 is a view for explaining the engagement shaft 749 of the first embodiment, (A) is a front view of the open / close door unit 740, (B) is a tongue-like member 741 along line A-A and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of an engagement shaft 749. 58 is a bottom view of the open / close door unit 740 of the first embodiment, where (A) is a view in a state where the tongue-like member 741 is advanced, and (B) is a view in a state where the tongue-like member 741 is backward It is.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the engagement shaft 749 is engaged with the engaged portion 741b formed in the lower center of the tongue-like member 741, and the power of the big winning hole solenoid 39b is transmitted to the tongue-like member 741. Ru.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the big winning opening solenoid 39b is disposed so that the plunger (movable iron core) 746 can move in the left-right direction, and the other end of the first arm 747 attached to the tip of the plunger 746 Connects to the second arm 748. Similar to the plunger 746, the first arm 747 can move only in the left and right direction, but the second arm 748 rotates the engagement shaft 749 in the front and rear direction by the shaft portion 748a, so the tongue member 741 also operates in the front and rear direction. Do.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), when the tongue-like member 741 is advanced, the big winning opening is closed, and conversely, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the tongue-like member 741 is The big winning opening is in the open state when

  Next, the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 724 will be described. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the special variable winning device unit 700 in the closed state of the open / close door 39c of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 60 is a plan view of the state in which two gaming balls flow down, and FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the same.

  62 is a view for explaining the rolling state of the game ball in the ball passage 724 in the closed state of the open / close door 39c of the first embodiment, and (A) is a front view of the special variation winning device unit 700, B) is a cross-sectional view at A-A.

  When the game ball rolls on the ball passage 724 in the closed state with the open / close door 39c closed without jumping, the game ball abuts on the back of the raised portion 742, the step 743 and the upper side wall 722, so the course of the arrow shown in FIG. Will roll. When the flow-down force is strong, it passes over the step 743 and abuts on the rear side ridge portion 702, but still follows the course approximate to the course of the arrow.

  In FIGS. 60 and 61, the gaming ball is actually flowing down the ball passage 724, but the width of the ball passage 724 is about 1.25 times the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball is opened and closed 39c It is also possible to roll in the front-rear direction while flowing downward on the left, and meandering zigzag without passing and passing the ball passage 724.

  If this is confirmed from the side, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the width from the peak portion of the back surface side ridge member 702 to the back surface of the upper side wall 722 is just narrowed to the width where the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes the front side of the rear side projection rib member 702, if the flow-down force is strong even a little, it abuts on the rear side projection rib member 702 and the flow-down force is reduced.

  FIG. 63 is an enlarged front view of the lower right portion of the game board 30 with the open / close door 39c of the first embodiment closed, and FIG. 64 is a front view with the open / close door 39c of the first embodiment open. . In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, it is shown that the rear of the front decoration member 721 can be seen in order to make it easy to understand the state in which the gaming ball wins the big winning opening. The front decorative member 721 may be made of a translucent material, and the rear side of the front decorative member 721 may be visible.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower right portion of the game board 30 with the open / close door 39c of the first embodiment closed, prepared to explain the state in which the game balls are staying in the ball passage 724. .

  In FIG. 63, since the open / close door 39c is in the closed state, the gaming balls flowing down the ball passage 724 pass above the open / close door 39c. Here, the game ball B1 located on the left side of the ball passage 724 is rolled down in a zigzag while flowing down the ball passage 724, and thus the flow-down force is weakened, and the distance from the game ball B2 located on the right side of the ball passage 724 However, the distance between the game ball B2 and the game ball B3 is short.

  In FIG. 64, the open / close door 39c is in an open state, and the game ball B1 falls into the central front flow path 727 and is awarded a prize winning opening. Also, the game ball B2 is about to drop into the central front flow channel 727, and will be awarded to the big winning opening as it is. Further, when the gaming ball B3 flowing downward to the left from the ball guiding portion 850 also flows downward to the ball passage 724, it is expected to win a prize winning opening.

  FIG. 65 shows the position of the gaming ball of FIG. 63 from diagonally left front, but the gaming ball B1 is rolling on the upper surface of the open / close door 39c and does not flow down the ball passage 724 at a stretch In the ball passage 724. The game ball B2 also flows down toward the big winning opening, and if the open / close door 39c is closed, it rolls in a zigzag in the ball passage 724 and stays in the ball passage 724.

[Effect of the special variation winning device of the first embodiment]
As described above, the special variation winning device 39 according to the first embodiment includes the ball passage 724 by the smooth inclined surface of the ball passage 724, the rear side protrusion 702, the front side protrusion 725, the raised portion 742, the step 743 and the like. In order to cause the game balls to stay, even when the open / close door 39c is opened only for a short period of time, more prize balls are generated, so the interest of the game can be greatly improved.

Modification 1 of the First Embodiment (Another Example of the Ball Passage 724)
Subsequently, a modification of the special variation winning device unit 700 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a plan view of the special variation winning device unit 700 according to Modification 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the same.

  In the first modification of the first embodiment, in addition to the protruding portion 742, a new protruding portion (peak portion, convex portion) 742 a is provided in the upstream portion of the ball passage 724 instead of the tongue member 741.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, in the present modification, three protuberances 742 are provided at the tip of tongue-like member 741, and further, upper sidewall 722 corresponding to the upstream portion of the big winning opening. Also on the rear face on the right side, that is, in the ball passage inlet portion of the front face decoration member 721, two raised portions 742a are provided obliquely facing each other.

  The protruding portions 742a are also provided at the locations, as shown by the arrow lines, in order to make the gaming ball zigzag in a longer distance than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment. The protruding portion 742a is provided on the upstream portion of the open / close door 39c in order to weaken the flow-down force in advance by the two raised portions 742a before flowing down to the upper surface of the open / close door 39c or the big winning opening. Therefore, the gaming ball tends to stay near the entrance of the ball passage 724 (that is, immediately before the big winning opening).

  In addition, the protruding portion 742a is a mountain shape in which many small surfaces are gathered (for example, 10), and due to such a multifaceted shape, gaming balls flowing down from above and diagonally from above are not popped out of the ball passage 724 inside the ball passage 724 Can be kept at

  As a result, when the ball passage 724 of the present modification has more game balls more easily staying in the ball passage 724 than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment, and the open / close door 39c is converted to the open state. , More game balls will be easier to win at once in the big winning opening.

  The shape of the raised portion 742a provided in the ball passage 724 of the front decorative member 721 may be a concave portion instead of a mountain-shaped convex portion. Further, it may be a fan-shaped depression having a larger bottom area than the raised portion 742a.

  Further, in the first modification of the first embodiment, the back surface side ridge portion 702 and the front surface side ridge member 725 are the same as the back surface side ridge portion 702 and the front surface side ridge member 725 in the first embodiment. Although the number is provided, this may be further increased. In this case, it is effective to increase the number of balls entering the large winning opening, by increasing the rear side protrusion 702 and the front side protrusion 725 on the upstream side of the opening and closing door 39c, but the opening and closing door 39c It may further be provided on the downstream side of

[Effect of Modification 1 of the First Embodiment (Another Example of the Ball Passage 724)]
As described above, in the first modification of the first embodiment, the game ball is provided more than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment by providing two ridges 742a obliquely facing each other at the entrance of the ball passage 724. The meandering distance can be increased, and more gaming balls can be retained in the ball passage 724.

  In addition, the game ball easily stays in the ball passage 724 in front of the big winning opening to weaken the flow-down right in front of the big winning opening, and the gaming ball wins in the big winning opening when the open / close door 39c is opened. Can be increased.

  Then, while flowing down into the ball passage 724, it is not possible to win a big winning opening, and reduce the game balls (so-called wasted balls) jumping out of the ball passage 724 from the left side of the ball passage 724 again into the game area 32 Can improve the fun of the game.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment (another example of the ball passage 724)]
FIG. 68 is a plan view of the special variation winning device unit 700 of Modification 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the same.

  In the second modification of the first embodiment, not only the tongue member 741 but also the upstream portion of the ball passage 724 is provided with a step 744 in addition to the raised portion (peak portion, convex portion) 742a.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the present modification, three protuberances 742 are provided at the tip of tongue-like member 741, and further, upper sidewall 722 which corresponds to the upstream portion of the big winning opening. One raised portion 742a is also provided on the back of the right side, that is, at the entrance of the ball passage of the front decorative member 721. Furthermore, in the present modification, three units (a set of the protrusion 742 and the step 743 are repeated three times) are provided on the tongue member 741 and the step 744 is provided for one unit on the opposite side of the protrusion 742a.

  The protrusion 742a and the step 744 are also provided in the portion, in order to weaken the flow of the game ball in advance before flowing down to the upper surface of the open / close door 39c or the big winning opening, as indicated by the arrow line. This is because the game balls are zigzagged over a longer distance than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment by the steps 743 and 744 and the raised portions 742 and 742a for the unit portion. Therefore, the gaming ball is more likely to stay near the entrance of the ball passage 724 (that is, immediately before the big winning opening), and an increase in the number of balls entering the big winning opening and a reduction in wasted balls are realized.

  Further, when compared with the first modification of the first embodiment, the length of the release portion 744a of the step 744 is longer than the length of the oblique portion in the diagonal forward direction of the raised portion 742a, so the gaming ball can be further enhanced. Easy to roll diagonally forward (easy to guide). Therefore, in this modification, it is expected that the game ball is forced to meander longer than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment of the first modification, and the number of staying balls and the residence time of the game ball in the ball passage 724 are further increased. .

  As in the first modification of the first embodiment, the raised portion 742a may be a recessed portion, and a rear side protruding portion 702 and a front side protruding member 725 may be further provided.

[Effect of Modification 2 of the First Embodiment (Another Example of the Ball Passage 724)]
Thus, the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment and the ball passage of the first variation of the first embodiment can be obtained by providing the raised portion 742a and the step 743a in the ball passage 724 of the second variation of the first embodiment. The residence time of the game balls can be made longer than 724, and more game balls can be made to win for the big winning opening.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment (another example of ball passage 724)]
In the second modification of the first embodiment, the entrance portion of the ball passage 724 is raised on the upper side wall 722 side (the glass frame 15 side) in the same manner as the tongue tip of the tongue 741 (a part corresponding to the opening / closing door 39c). The portion 742 a is provided, and the step 744 is provided on the base member 701 side. On the other hand, in the third modification of the first embodiment, the bottom surface shape of the inlet of the ball passage 724 is formed so that the front and back of the tongue 741 are reversed.

  FIG. 70 is a view for explaining the shapes of the protruding portion 742a and the step 743a provided on the upstream side of the ball passage 724 according to the third modification of the first embodiment, wherein (A) is a passage of the second modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 7B is an enlarged front view of this modified example in which the positions of the protruding portion 742a and the step 743a are switched.

  FIG. 70A shows the entrance of the ball passage 724 according to the second modification of the first embodiment. In FIG. 70 (A), a step 743a and a protrusion 742a for three units, not one unit, are formed at the entrance of the ball passage 724, but three units for one unit are added to the portion. Three units are shown here because it is possible to add minutes.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the step 743a is on the side of the base member 701 and the protruding portion 742a is provided on the side of the glass frame 15, the gaming ball is made to abut on the side of the base member 701. Since guidance can be made, it is easy to bring the gaming ball into contact with the waved portion 701a, and the flow of the gaming ball can be effectively weakened. On the other hand, the upper side wall 722 and the glass frame 15 around the upper side wall 722 collide with each other in a state where the flow of the game balls is not sufficiently weakened, so damage to the glass surface of the glass frame 15 can not be sufficiently suppressed. There is a fear.

  Therefore, in the present modification, the positions of the raised portion 742a and the step 743a in the front-rear direction are interchanged at the entrance portion of the ball passage 724 to further reduce the collision force on the upper side wall 722 and the glass frame 15 around the upper side wall 722. It was to be.

  Further, in the step 743a, a release portion 743b is formed on the upstream side of the ball passage 724 and the step is obliquely cut, and the right side is provided on the downstream side. Therefore, it is possible to guide the gaming ball diagonally forward by the release portion 743b, and to reduce the flow of the gaming ball largely by the right angle portion.

  That is, since the step 743a has a higher guiding force than the raised portion 742a, and there is a predetermined distance from the bottom of the step 743a to the upper side wall 722 side, it is closer to the upper side wall 722 than the ball passage 724 of the first embodiment. Contact and collision can be suppressed.

  And since the meandering distance of the gaming ball in the ball passage 724 of the second modification of the first embodiment and the meandering distance of the gaming ball in the ball passage 724 of the present modification hardly change, the glass surface is protected in this modification. In addition, it is possible to exert the staying function of the gaming ball and the suppressing function of the wasted ball equivalent to those of the second modification of the first embodiment.

  Further, in this modification, by arranging the vibration sensor near the upper side wall 722 at the entrance of the ball passage 724, when the gaming ball collides with the upper side wall 722 near the entrance of the ball passage 724, the upper side wall 722 emits light It can be done. In this case, since the upper side wall 722 emits light each time the game ball collides with the upper side wall 722, an effective light-emitting effect can be provided.

[Effect of Modification 3 of the First Embodiment (Another Example of the Ball Passage 724)]
As described above, according to the present modification, at the entrance of the ball passage 724, the release portion 743b and the right-angled portion are formed on the upper side wall 722 side according to the positional relationship opposite to the tongue tip of the tongue 741. The glass surface can be protected while effectively retaining the gaming balls.

  In addition, since the upper side wall 722 emits light for a short time each time the game ball collides with the upper side wall 722, the player's attention is drawn near the entrance of the upper side wall 722, and the game ball enters the big winning opening Can give a feeling of exhilaration.

[Modification 4 of the first embodiment (addition of V winning function)]
Next, Modification 4 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG.

  In the fourth variation of the first embodiment, the special variation winning device 39 is provided with a specific area, and when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it becomes a so-called V prize, and the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state Become.

  FIG. 71 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10 of the fourth modification of the first embodiment. In contrast to FIG. 3, the newly added configuration is the specific area switch 38a and the specific area solenoid 38b.

  The specific area switch 38a is connected to the proximity I / F 121 to detect the passage of gaming balls to the specific area. Also, a specific area solenoid 38b is provided to drive a V door 38c (see FIG. 72) that opens the flow-down path to the specific area. Similar to the other solenoids, the specific area solenoid 38b is provided such that a power supply voltage of 32 VDC is supplied from the power supply device 260 via the first driver 138a.

  FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the special variation winning device unit 700 of Modification 4 of the first embodiment. In contrast to FIG. 52, in the present modification, a specific area switch 38 a is provided in the housing 731. Further, a V door 38c is provided above the specific area switch 38a. FIG. 73 is a rear view of the base member 701 of the fourth modification of the first embodiment.

  The area where the specific area switch 38a is provided is an area where only the game balls that have won the special winning opening can flow down. Specifically, the game ball (winning ball) dropped to the big winning opening when the open / close door 39c is opened passes through the big winning opening switch 35a and flows down the central front flow path 727 (see FIG. 53), and the base member The large winning opening 706 (see FIG. 53) is passed from the front. The winning balls having flowed back to the rear of the base member large winning opening 706 flow downward from the substantially central portion of the housing 731 and fall onto the closed V door 38c.

  At this time, if the V-door 38c is in the open state, the V-door 38c is pulled backward, so that the winning ball can pass through the annular ring of the specific area switch 38a. Thereafter, the winning balls pass through the lower housing opening 733 and are collected together with the other out balls.

  On the other hand, when the V door 38c is in the closed state, the winning balls can not pass through the specific area, and therefore, flow down to the right side of the V door 38c and pass through the right housing opening 734 from the front. Then, it passes through a remaining ball discharging switch 782 provided at the rear of the housing 731 and is collected together with other out balls.

  FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of a main portion 760 of Modification 4 of the first embodiment. In contrast to FIG. 54 (B), in the present modification, a V winning unit 780 is additionally provided.

  FIG. 75 is a view for explaining the opening and closing operation of the V door 38c of the modification 4 of the first embodiment, wherein (A) is a front view of the housing 731 and (B) is a state when the V door 38c is closed. A-A line sectional view, (C) is an A-A line sectional view when the V door 38 c is in an open state.

  76 and 77 are rear perspective views of the housing 731 on which the V prize unit 780 of the fourth modification of the first embodiment is assembled. FIG. 76 is a view of the V door 38 c in a closed state, and FIG. It is a figure of the V door 38c in the open state.

  The V winning unit 780 is a module that mainly provides the back and forth movement of the V door 38c, and is provided on the back of the housing 731 so as not to impede the operation of the open / close door unit 740.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the V prize unit 780 transmits a plurality of links for transmitting the power of the specific area switch 38a, the specific area solenoid 38b, the V door 38c, the remaining ball discharging switch 782, and the specific area solenoid 38b to the V door 38c. The members 783, 784, 785 (see FIG. 76) are assembled to the V prize base member 781. The open / close door unit 740 in the present modification is the same as the open / close door unit 740 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 54 (B).

  When the V prize unit 780 is attached to the housing 731, the specific area solenoid 38 b is accommodated in a specific area solenoid accommodating portion 731 b formed on the back side of the housing 731. The V door 38 c is provided to penetrate a V door opening 731 c formed in a rectangular shape at a substantially central portion of the housing 731 from the rear side. The specific area switch 38a is provided through a lower housing rear surface cutout 376 cut out from the lower housing opening 733 formed immediately below the V door opening 731c. The residual ball discharging switch 782 is provided to penetrate through the remaining ball discharging switch opening 735 formed immediately below the right housing opening 734 from the rear. As shown in FIG. 75, the V door 38 c is configured such that the front 40% of the V door member 785 protrudes to the front of the housing 731.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, three link members for transmitting the power of the specific area solenoid 38b to the V door member 785 (V door 38c) will be described.

  In FIG. 76, the V door member 785 is pushed forward and the V door 38c closes the upper part of the specific area switch 38a, and the V prize unit 780 is in a state before operation. Here, a plunger (not shown) of the specific area solenoid 38b is pushed out of the housing of the solenoid, and is drawn into the housing in FIG.

  One end of a first arm member 783 is attached to the head of the plunger (here, the head is downward because the solenoid is fixed downward). The first arm member 783 is a member that can move up and down following the movement of the plunger. The other end of the first arm member 783 is bifurcated by the two finger portions 783a, and the follower pin 784a of the second arm member 784 is engaged with the crotch portion surrounded by the finger portions 783a.

  The second arm member 784 is a member attached to the V prize base member 781 so as to be rotatable about the shaft 784 b, and includes a driven pin 784 a and a pivot pin 784 c. The second arm member 784 is attached to turn at an angle orthogonal to the rear surface of the housing 731. Therefore, the turning pin 784c can be turned in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the movement in the vertical direction is converted to the movement in the front-rear direction by the second arm member 784. The pivot pin 784 c is engaged with the engaged portion 785 a of the V door member 785 to operate the V door member 785 back and forth.

  The V-door member 785 is guided on the guide member 786 and operates only in the front-rear direction to convert the V-door 38c into the closed state and the open state.

[Effect of Modification 4 of the First Embodiment (Addition of V Prize Function)]
In the present modification, since the V door 38c is provided in the special winning device 38, the gaming state after the big hit is a definite change state only when the V winning occurs.

(Second embodiment [game effect in the special game state])
Next, with reference to FIG. 78 to FIG. 88, game effects in the second embodiment will be described. The game effect is, for example, an effect by an image displayed on the display device 41. In addition to the image effects, effects by characters (effects of characters, light emission, color change), effects by decoration members (light emission, color change), opening / closing operation of the variable winning device may be included in the game effect, The combination may be a game effect.

  FIG. 78 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state of the second embodiment.

  The display screen area of the display device 41 mainly includes a central display area 551 crossing the central part of the screen, a lower left display area 552 which is an area at the lower left of the screen, an upper left display area 553 which is an area at the upper left of the screen It is divided into an upper right display area 554 which is a display area at the upper right and a lower right display area 555 which is a display area at the lower right of the screen. In FIGS. 87 and 88, the central display area 551 is further subdivided.

  (A) is the interval of the third round and the fourth round in the special game state. It is displayed in the upper left display area 553 that the big hit is determined by the big hit symbol “888” and the next round is the fourth round. Further, in the upper right display area 554, a right-handed hit is displayed to aim for the special winning opening. The opening of the special winning opening so far is all long opening (the second opening period (for example, 30 seconds)), the number of winning game balls at the long opening till the current time (number of winnings to the large winning opening × 15) ) Is displayed in the lower left display area 552 as 300 balls (second winning number display means). The number of acquired game balls displayed in the lower left display area 552 is a cumulative number of acquired balls at the long opening time.

  Further, the special variation winning device 39 is in the operation stop state, and the open / close door 39c is in the closed state. For this reason, it is the timing when the gaming ball is retained on the open / close door 39c in the closed state.

  (I) is a state in which the fourth round short opening (first opening period (for example, 0.2 seconds)) is performed. In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment provided with the prize assisting means, there is a sufficient possibility of winning in the big prize winning opening even at the short opening time, and the central display area 551 displays "Aim at the attacker!" In the lower part, an effect to be emphasized is displayed. Then, since one gaming ball is won at the short opening time, “+15” is displayed in the lower right display area 555. In the lower right display area 555, the cumulative winning prize ball number at the time of short opening is displayed (first winning number display means).

  In the special fluctuation winning device 39, the open / close door 39c is opened, and the special fluctuation winning device 39 emits light with the front decorative member 721 and the upper side wall 722 as light emitting portions in accordance with the opening of the open / close door 39c. The front decorative member 721 and the upper side wall 722 include a light emitting member (LED).

  (U) is the interval of the fourth round and the fifth round. Even in the interval, in the center display area 551, "Aim for an attacker!" Is displayed so that the gaming ball can immediately win after the end of the interval (for example, one second). The number of game balls acquired so far is 300 for the cumulative long opening winning prize, and 15 for the cumulative short opening winning prize.

  (E) is a state in which the fifth round short opening has been executed. With the effect at the lower part of the screen and the light emission effect of the special variation winning device 39, the open / close door 39c is short-opened. Since one winning combination has occurred in the short opening, the display of the lower right display area 555 is displayed as “+30”.

  (O) is the state where all rounds are finished. The central display area 551 displays the number of accumulated winning balls at the long opening, and the lower right display area 555 is trying to add the number of accumulated winning balls at the short opening + 150 at the same time. Further, in the lower left display area 552, a suggestion character suggesting a gaming state after the special gaming state is displayed, and a state suggestion effect is executed. The suggested characters will be described in detail in the following FIGS. 79 and 80.

  In the state of (?), The number of winning balls in the long opening and the number of winning balls in the short opening are added, and the number of winning balls obtained in the present big hit is displayed. In the lower left display area 552, the suggested character is continuously displayed.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment provided with the prize assisting means can reduce the waste ball passing through the ball passage 724 by removing the opening timing of the big winning opening, so the short opening time and the long opening time You can earn more prize balls. Then, an interval before opening the short opening or a display screen in a round in which the short opening is performed is displayed to aim at an attacker, and an effect (emphasis effect on the screen) and a light emitting effect are performed, which is effective. The player can aim at the special variation winning device 39. Therefore, it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that it is possible to obtain more award balls than conventional gaming machines.

  Note that the effect may be displayed at the timing when the special variation winning device 39 operates, or the effect may be displayed at a fixed timing. In addition, the special fluctuation winning device 39 may be made to emit light at the timing when the special fluctuation winning device 39 operates, or the special fluctuation winning device 39 at the timing when the gaming ball passes the ball passage 724 or the contact with the upper side wall 722. You may make it light-emit. Further, the effect and the light emission effect of the special variation winning device 39 may or may not be synchronized.

  FIG. 79 is a table for selecting a suggested character according to the second embodiment, in which (A) is a table when a high probability state is determined and replacement processing is not performed, and (B) is a high probability state not determined and substitution (C) is a table when the high probability state is determined and the replacement process is performed, and (D) is a table when the high probability state is not determined and the replacement process is performed. . The suggested character of the state suggestion effect is selected by the suggested character selection table.

  The substitution process is a process of reselecting a suggested character once selected to another suggested character, and another suggested character may be set by the reselection to the same suggested character as the first selection. It may be replaced by The contents of the control will be described in an effect content determination process described later. The case of executing the replacement process is, for example, the case of being in a specific mode.

  First, referring to FIGS. 79 (A) and (B), from the case where the replacement process is not performed, when the high probability is determined, the smile suggestion character is selected at a ratio of 250/250, and special After the end of the gaming state, the player is notified of transition to the high probability state. On the other hand, if the high probability has not been determined, or if the low probability state has been determined, the suggestive character of the painful face (painful face) is selected at a rate of 250/250, and after the end of the special gaming state Informs the player of transition to the low probability state.

  Next, the case where the replacement process is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 (C) and 79 (D). When the high probability is determined, the smile suggestion character is selected at a rate of 130/250. Also, a painful face suggestive character is selected (replaced) at a rate of 30/250, and a strong face suggestive character with sunglasses is also selected (replaced) at a rate of 30/250. Also, the child's face suggestive character is selected (replaced) at a rate of 60/250.

  Therefore, even if the high probability is determined, in the specific mode or the like, a pain-faced suggestion character may be displayed at a rate of 30/250, and thereafter, the state shifts to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, if the high probability is not determined or the low probability state is determined, the smile suggestion character is selected (replaced) at a rate of 60/250, and the pain face suggestion character is 130/130. It is selected at a rate of 250. Also, strong face suggestive characters are selected (replaced) at a rate of 60/250, and child face suggestive characters are selected (replaced) at a rate of 0/250.

  Therefore, even if the low probability is determined, in the specific mode or the like, for example, a smile suggestive character may be displayed at a rate of 60/250, and thereafter, the state shifts to the low probability state.

  That is, when substitution control is not performed, 100% reliable notification is given about the gaming state after the special gaming state, and when substitution control is performed, uncertain notification is made with some degree of reliability. . Therefore, the presence or absence of substitution control changes the notification about the transition to a certain change that is very interesting to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that words may be added according to the expression of the suggested character, or even if the proportion of positive words selected is increased according to the game state, separately from the display of the suggested character. Good.

  FIG. 80 is a suggested character re-setting table according to the second embodiment. The resetting table is a table used for resetting control of suggested characters different from replacement control, and in particular, a table read by the effect control device 300 in the third modification of the second embodiment described later.

  The reset control is executed, for example, in a specific gaming state. The suggested characters selected in the resetting table are all displayed with some or most of the expressions hidden. Here, a predetermined range of the suggestion character's face is hidden by a rectangular black cover, for example, if it is concealed around the eye part, if only the lower part of the face is concealed, if it is concealed by a vertical rectangle, There are multiple coverage patterns, such as when hidden by a rectangle.

  At the beginning of the display of the suggested character, the covering portion is not completely visible in black, but when the operation amount of the operation button 25 becomes a predetermined amount or more, the covering is removed and the display of the suggested character becomes completely visible. With regard to the coating of the suggestion character, the thickness of the coating may be reduced according to the operation amount of the operation button 25 or the operation method, and the coating portion may be gradually visible.

  In the case where the high probability is determined, the smile hint character hidden horizontally in the center of the eye part is reset at a ratio of 130/250, and is hidden in the vertical center part of the eye and the mouth The painful face suggestion character is reset at a rate of 30/250, and the strong face suggestion character with the eyes and mouth completely hidden is reset at a rate of 90/250.

  On the other hand, if the high probability has not been determined, or if the low probability state has been determined, the smile suggestion character hidden horizontally in the vicinity of the eye part is reset at a rate of 30/250, Painful face suggestion characters hidden vertically in the eye and mouth area are re-set at a rate of 130/250, and strong face suggestive characters completely hide the eyes and mouth are reopened at a rate of 90/250 It is set.

  The suggested character set by the reset table is different from the suggested character selected according to the gaming state, but is replaced with the suggested character not corresponding to the gaming state when the specific mode is selected There is also.

  The suggested character may be displayed only at the end of the special game state, or may be displayed at the timing when the V winning is generated. In addition, the special game state may be displayed a plurality of times, and in that case, the suggested character selected for each display may be changed. Further, the selectivity and substitution rate in FIGS. 79 and 80 are examples, and the settings of 250/250 and 0/250 do not necessarily have to be 100% and 0%.

  In addition, a selection table of suggested characters corresponding to each scale of the meter (see FIG. 88) may be prepared.

  Next, the effects of the promotion image for the player will be described. The promotion image is an image for urging the player to change the amount of operation of the operation handle 24. The promotion image may include an image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 25.

  FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device 39 in the special game state of the second embodiment. Here, the display for prompting a right-handed move while being continuously displayed from left to right.

  (A) to (U) in FIG. 81 correspond to (A) to (U) in FIG. 78, and the display of "right-handed →" prompting a right-handed change displayed in the upper right display area 554 changes Is different from FIG.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 81, the display of "right-handed →" is repeatedly displayed by moving from left to right. In particular, as shown in (v), the upper left display area 553 and the upper right display area 554 are traversed from left to right. Such display allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player is urged to hit the right.

  In the upper left display area 553, although the number of rounds and the big hit symbol are displayed, even if the display of "right-handed →" crosses the upper part of the screen from the left to the right, the position does not overlap with the big hit symbol. "Right strike →" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the jackpot symbol without making it difficult to visually recognize "888" indicating the jackpot symbol by "right-handing →". In the drawing, “3 right-handed →” is displayed, but the “3” part on the left side of right-handed → is a movement trace indicating that the “right-handed →” display is moving.

  FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device 39 in the special game state of the second embodiment. In this case, a display for moving the ball to the attacker is displayed while being displayed continuously from the top to the bottom.

  (I) to (E) in FIG. 82 correspond to (I) to (E) in FIG. 78, and the point at which the display of “Attack Me! It is the difference between

  As shown in (i) to (e) of FIG. 82, the display of “Attack an attacker!” Is repeatedly displayed by moving from the top to the bottom. In particular, since the player moves from the upper end to the lower end of the screen, the player can intuitively recognize that the release of the attacker continues, and the presentation with an impact can improve the interest of the game. .

  Further, the display of "Aim for an attacker!" Is displayed so as to fall from the top to the bottom, so that it can be intuitively recognized that the ball entering the big prize is a drop type.

  In addition, although the display of "Attack the attacker!" Passes through the upper left display area 553 but does not pass the display area of the big hit symbol, the big hit symbol does not become difficult to visually recognize, and the player misinterprets the big hit symbol. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the movement display of FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 may be displayed in a repeated loop form, may be displayed only once in the big hit, and when it is repeatedly displayed, the display area of the big hit symbol It may be displayed so as to pass through different places while avoiding. Further, the movement display may be continuous display, or may be flickering type by intermittent display.

  FIG. 83 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an effect interlocked with the special variation winning device 39 in the special game state of the second embodiment. Here, the image of the operation handle 24 is displayed on the display device 41 as a display prompting a right strike. Further, the image of the special variation winning device 39 is displayed on the display device 41 as a display prompting to aim at the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 83, an operation handle image 562 and a special variation winning device image 563 are displayed on the display screen as a direct action on the player.

  The operation handle image 562 makes the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 larger (changes the amount of operation), and urges a right strike with a stronger firing force. In the character display of "right strike →", the player reads the character "right strike →", recognizes that this character is displayed as a right strike, and then turns the amount of the operation handle 24 to make it right strike. Generally, when the operation handle image 562 is displayed, the operation handle image 562 can be recognized and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 can be increased as it is. That is, since the time from reading of a character and its recognition to movement can be cut, the player can reflectively move to movement and is more direct to the player than character information. I can work on it. As a result, the burden on the player (for example, the burden on the brain due to the cut in the recognition process) can be reduced, and the player can respond quickly.

  Further, since the image of the special variation winning device 39 is displayed with emphasis (effect) in the special variation winning device 39, the character is read in the same manner as described above, and the meaning of the character is recognized. Since the time from the start to the operation can be cut, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the player can respond quickly.

  In addition, the operation handle image 562 and the special variation winning device image 563 may be displayed until the ending. The operation handle image 562 may be displayed only at the timing of transition from the state in which the left strike is advantageous (the state before the big hit) to the state in which the right strike is advantageous (the state after the big hit determination).

  In addition, the effect mode in which the promotion image shown in FIG. 81 moves from left to right may be combined with the operation handle image 562, and the effect mode in which the promotion image shown in FIG. It may be combined with the device image 563.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 in the present embodiment, the special variation winning device 39 is provided near the collective display 50. Therefore, for example, the special variation winning device 39 of the present embodiment emits light with an emission color different from that of the collective display 50 emitting red, so that the contrast with the vicinity of the special variation winning device 39 can be brought about. As a result, the light emission effect by the special variation winning device 39 becomes more impressive.

  Furthermore, the light emission effect (light emission color, light emission timing, light emission pattern, gradation, etc.) by the special variation winning device 39 and the special variation winning device image 563 may be displayed in synchronization or displayed in a different manner. It is also good. Naturally, the effect displayed in the special variation winning device image 563 may be synchronized with the light emission timing of the special variation winning device 39 or may be displayed in a different manner. In the case of synchronizing and displaying, it is an effect with a sense of unity, in other words, it is possible to give the player an illusion that there are a plurality of special variation winning devices 39. In the case of displaying in a different manner, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling glare, which reduces the burden on the player.

[Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, since the state indication display indicating the probability state after the end of the special game state is displayed in the second half of the special game state, information with high interest of the player is notified to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the state indication display is replaced (may be substituted) from the original state indication display with another state indication display depending on the game mode selected by the player, the interest of the game can be improved. .

  Further, since the number of gaming balls acquired during the long opening and the number of gaming balls acquired during the short opening are separately displayed and summed up on the ending screen, an effective effect for entertaining the player is executed. In particular, in the gaming machine 10 having the prize assisting function shown in the first embodiment, since one or more prizes can be sufficiently achieved even in the short opening, the combination with the gaming machine 10 having the prize assisting function is sufficient. The above effects can be drawn in minutes. That is, the short opening round, which has not been able to provide the player with sufficient interest until now, becomes attractive together with the function of the prize assisting means, even if it is open for a short time.

  In addition, an example of the effect that the character display of "right strike →" urges right strike moves from left to right, and the effect of the character display of "Attack Aim!" Encourages attackers to move from top to bottom In one example, the player can intuitively recognize that a ball is hit in the moving direction of the display, and can provide an impact with an impact. Further, since the movement display passes an area not overlapping the area where the big hit symbol is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the big hit symbol without interrupting the visual recognition of the big hit symbol.

  In addition, since the display of the operation handle image 562 and the special variation winning device image 563 directly transmits information to the player rather than the character display, the player's burden (for example, reading of the character information and its meaning) It is possible to reduce the cut of the process required for recognition. In addition, since the player can shift to the operation in a reflective manner, it is possible to respond more quickly than the transmission by the character information. As a result, the effect of suppressing the difference in the skill of the player can be achieved, and even those with little game experience can enjoy the fun of the game.

  Furthermore, by making the luminescent color of the special variation winning device 39 different from the luminescent color of the collective display 50, it is possible to make the luminous effect by the special variation winning device 39 more impressive. Further, by causing the light emission effect by the special variation winning device 39 and the special variation winning device image 563 to be synchronized and displayed, it is possible to provide a uniform effect. In addition, it is possible to display the light emission effect by the special variation winning device 39 and the special variation winning device image 563 in different modes, and for example, it is possible to reduce the visual burden on the player.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment (additional effect during ending)]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an effect in the special game state of the modification 1 of the second embodiment. Here, the cumulative winning prize ball number during the short opening is displayed in a number different from the actual number over a predetermined period, and the additional effect is executed on the ending screen.

  (A) is the 5th round of the jackpot, in which one winning combination has occurred at the time of short opening. The number of game balls obtained at this time is 300 for long opening and 30 for short opening.

  (I) is the 14th round, and one winning combination has occurred at the short opening time. The number of game balls acquired at this time is 300 for long opening and 150 for short opening.

  (U) is the 15th round and one winning combination has occurred at the time of short opening. The number of game balls acquired at this time is 300 for long opening and 165 for short opening. However, in the lower right display area 555, "+150", which is the same value as in the 14th round, is displayed, and 15 balls are not reflected. In other words, 15 balls are intentionally displayed less.

  (E) is a state in which all the rounds are finished and the number of acquired balls is displayed. The central display area 551 displays the cumulative acquisition ball number 300 in the long opening, and the cumulative acquisition ball number 150 in the short opening is about to be added. In the lower left display area 552, a smile suggestive character is displayed, and it is informed that the probability state after this is highly likely to be the high probability state.

  In the state of (o), 450 spheres are displayed in the central display area 551 in which the cumulative number of acquired balls at long opening 300 and the number 150 at short opening (actually 165) are added.

  In the lower right display area 555, "(+)" is displayed as "+15 on top!", And it is reported that 15 balls have been acquired. In fact, although the winnings in (U) are reflected here, when added with a plus at the last end of the ending, the player feels a sense of value, and a sense of getting a bonus and Become.

  In particular, since how much the game value (the winning prize ball) has been earned is the most noticeable part for the player, displaying that a part of the winning prize ball is finally displayed is displayed once Because the winning prize ball number is further added, it is possible to give the player a happy feeling.

  Here, although it is difficult for the player to notice that there is no winning and no reflection of the numerical value, the winning portion at the short opening time is added to the displayed amount, but the winning portion at the long opening may be added. Also, not only one winning portion (15 winning balls), but also a plurality of winning portions may be added, and not only an integral multiple of 1 winning portion (15 balls) may be added, A number less than one winning portion (for example, 11 balls) or a number exceeding an integral multiple (for example, 33 balls) may be added.

  FIG. 85 is a view for explaining another example of the effect of the modification 1 of the second embodiment.

  (A) is a state in which the special transition winning device 39 displays the mode transition selection screen when it is a predetermined round of the long release pattern. In the lower right display area 555, a display for selecting the normal mode or the tiger mode appears. The mode is selected by the operation button 25. When there is no operation input of the operation button 25, the normal mode selected by default (standard) is selected.

  In (B), on the ending screen, gaming points are provided separately from the gaming value (the winning prize ball). In the lower right display area 555, “45 points get” is displayed as a game point. The game points are points that can be used, for example, for displaying a bonus image, a bonus image, and obtaining music and items, and can be recorded in a memory or the like in the effect control device 300.

  By giving not only the game value but also values (game points) other than the game value, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  (C) is a state where the remaining time including the opening time of the short opening of the special variation winning device 39 and the time of the interval is displayed. In the upper left display area 553, the “remaining time 1:00” is displayed together with the jackpot symbol, and the player is informed that the remaining time is just one minute. This remaining time may be until the opening time of the end of the round ends, or may be the time until the end of the next round.

  Since it is difficult to win a prize on the special variation winning device 39 if not paying attention to the remaining opening time rather than the remaining opening number, displaying in this way makes the player more aware of the remaining time of the short opening round. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect of Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, in the first modification of the second embodiment, since a part of the acquired game ball number during the short opening is displayed by the additional effect, the player is given a sense of profit, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the selection of the game mode, the acquisition of the game points, and the display of the remaining time are all elements for improving the game property, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved.

[Modification 2 in special gaming state (providing an item / award)]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the effect of the second modification of the second embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a display icon table of the second modification of the second embodiment. In the second modification, the number of acquired balls at the time of short opening is not a numerical value but an icon, an item, or a character is displayed, and a benefit is awarded according to the acquired number of balls at the end and the displayed icon, item, or character.

  (A) is a state in which the special variation winning device 39 is short-opened in the fourth round and the gaming ball has won one ball. A display icon is selected by lottery based on the occurrence of the winning, and a display icon of ☆ is displayed in the center right display area 551b.

  In the fifth round, the special variation winning device 39 is short-opened in the fifth round, and the gaming ball is in a state of winning one ball. A display icon is randomly selected based on the occurrence of the winning, and a peach display icon is additionally displayed in the center right display area 551b.

  (V) is a state in which an effect has been executed in which all rounds have ended and the cumulative number of long openings obtained is added to the cumulative number of short openings (9 × 15 + 1 × 15). At the end of the 15th round, a 10-ball short-opening prize occurs, but in all the lottery, the icon of ☆ is selected for 9 balls, and the icon of a peach is selected for 1 ball. In addition, a smile suggestive character is displayed in the lower left display area 552 to notify of transition to the high probability state (state suggestion effect is executed).

  (E) is a screen for notifying that 45 points of gaming points have been awarded from among the broken peach icons when the number of balls obtained in long opening and short opening is added up. As shown in FIG. 87, a peach icon is an icon for giving gaming points.

  As shown in FIG. 87, there are, for example, five types of display icons, and the icon of * indicates the number of acquired balls. The icon of ★ indicates that the prize ball is paid out but there is no indication of the number of acquired balls (target for additional effect), the peach icon gives the game points, the note icon gives the music bonus, the treasure box icon gives the customize icon , Will be. The winning balls are paid out regardless of which icon is selected.

  The drawing of the display icon is executed each time a short open prize is generated, and a maximum of five display icons are displayed in the center right display area 551b and the center left display area 551c. For example, when “20 × 2 ★ × 2 Peach × 2 notes × 1 Treasure box × 2” is displayed at the end of a long open acquisition number of 20 balls and a short open acquisition number of 12, +150 balls, 96 points get Music number 1 and level 2 items are awarded, and a winning ball 480 balls (total winning number 32 balls x 15 balls) are paid.

[Effect of Modified Example 2 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, the lottery is executed for each winning at the time of the short opening, the display icon is determined, and the privilege according to the cumulative number for each display icon is given, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is possible to give the player a motivation to work on the game to obtain rare benefits, and it is expected to contribute to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine 10.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment (state indication effect combined with meter display)]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an effect of the modification 3 of the second embodiment. In the third modification, the meter is displayed on the screen as a display representing the amount of operation of the operation button 25, and the display mode of the suggested character changes according to the amount of gauge of the meter (according to the amount of operation). Here, in accordance with the amount of operation of the operation button 25, the state suggestion effects after (2) are branched into three patterns.

  (1) is the end of the special game state, and the remaining time is 20 seconds. In the center right display area 551 b, “Continuous hitting! OR long press!” And a button image are displayed, and an image (promotion image) prompting the user to operate the operation button 25 is displayed. Also, in the center left display area 551c, "Aim for an attacker! 表示" is displayed, an image (promotion image) prompting to hit the large winning opening is displayed, and the player's line of sight is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The effect is displayed as an aim to lower the

  In addition, a meter is displayed in the central effect area 551 a to notify that it is an operable period of the operation button 25. Further, the special variation winning device 39 emits light in accordance with the opening of the open / close door 39c.

  The subsequent effects branch from here depending on the amount of operation of the operation button 25. First, cases (2) and (3) will be described, in which the operation is not performed at all or the amount of operation does not reach the predetermined value (when the upper limit is not reached).

  (2) is a state in which the operation button 25 is not operated at all after that. Alternatively, the operation amount does not reach the predetermined value. In the upper left display area 553, the remaining time is displayed as 5 seconds together with the jackpot symbol, and the gauge level of the meter has not increased at all. This also includes the case where the operation amount of the operation button 25 does not reach the predetermined value, in which case the gauge level of the meter is slightly increased.

  Moreover, an effect is displayed on the lower part of the screen together with the promotion image, and the special variation winning device 39 emits light in accordance with the opening of the open / close door 39c.

  (3) is an ending screen, in which the number of acquired balls at the time of long release is added to the number of acquired balls at the time of short release. Here, the suggested character shown in FIG. 79 or FIG. 80 is not displayed. This is because the operation button 25 was not operated at all or the amount of operation was small.

  Next, (2 ') and (3') will be described which is a case where the operation amount has reached a predetermined value but has not reached the upper limit value (when the meter has not reached full).

  (2 ') is a state where the operation of the operation button 25 has not reached the upper limit. The gauge level of the meter has reached 4 gauge but has not reached the upper limit of 6 gauge.

  Moreover, an effect is displayed on the lower part of the screen together with the promotion image, and the special variation winning device 39 emits light in accordance with the opening of the open / close door 39c. Although the suggested character is not displayed on the screen of (2 ′) where the operation has been started, when the operation is accepted, the suggested character covered with a part of the expression is displayed, and then according to the amount of operation The coating may be thinner.

  (3 ') is an ending screen, and is a state where the number of acquisition balls at the time of short opening is added to the number of acquisition balls at the time of long opening. Here, based on the fact that the operation upper limit has not been reached, a part of the facial expression is hidden and the covered suggestion character is displayed in the lower left display area 552, and the state suggestion display is made for the probability state after this .

  Here, the coating of the suggestion character may have a thickness such that the coating portion is not completely visible, or the thickness of the coating may be reduced according to the operation amount. That is, if the upper limit is not reached, the indication of the state indication is not displayed in a complete state without covering the indication character.

  Next, (2 ′ ′) and (3 ′ ′) will be described, which is the case where the operation amount reaches the upper limit value (when the meter is full).

  (2 ′ ′) is a state in which the operation of the operation button 25 has reached the upper limit. The gauge level of the meter has reached the upper limit.

  Moreover, an effect is displayed on the lower part of the screen together with the promotion image, and the special variation winning device 39 emits light in accordance with the opening of the open / close door 39c. Although the suggested character is not displayed on the screen (2 ′ ′) at which the operation has been started, when the operation is accepted, the covered suggested character may be displayed. In this case, the covering is light according to the amount of operation. It will be.

  (3 ′ ′) is the ending screen, in which the number of balls obtained at the long release is added to the number obtained at the long release. In this case, there is no covering based on reaching the operation upper limit. A suggested character is displayed in the lower left display area 552, and a status indication is displayed for the subsequent probability state.

  The increase or decrease of the gauge may be the operation timing regardless of the operation amount of the operation button 25 (for example, the number of times of operation or the operation time), or may be the operation sequence or operation pattern (for example, It may be increased or decreased depending on the pattern).

  In addition, the display of the meter (operation acceptable period) is not limited to the end of the special game state, but may be displayed from the beginning or the middle of the special game state, or may be displayed intermittently. In addition, depending on the mode and the jackpot symbol, the display timing of the meter may change or may not be displayed at all. If the meter is not displayed at all, no indication of status indication is given.

[Effect of Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, since the mode of the state indication display changes according to the operation amount, the player's willingness to operate the operation button 25 can be improved. Then, when the mode of the state indication display changes in stages according to the operation amount (when the covering becomes faint gradually), for example, the transmission amount becomes 50%, and the indication of the indication character can be recognized. Since it is possible to adjust the amount of operation in the operable period, such as stopping the operation, the burden on the player can be reduced.

[Effects of Modifications 1 to 3 of Second Embodiment]
In this way, displaying that a part of the winning prize ball is finally added can give the player a happy feeling because the winning prize ball number once displayed is further added.

  In addition, since it is difficult to win a prize on the special variation winning device 39 if not paying attention to the remaining opening time rather than the remaining opening number, displaying in this manner makes the player aware of the remaining time of the short opening round. It is possible to concentrate and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the lottery is executed for each winning at the time of the short opening, the display icon is determined, and the privilege according to the cumulative number for each display icon is given, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is possible to give the player a motivation to work on the game to obtain rare benefits, and it is expected to contribute to the improvement of the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, since the mode of the state indication display changes according to the operation amount, the player's willingness to operate the operation button 25 can be improved. In particular, when there is no means to recognize the probability state (only to recognize the possibility of the probability state) only the state indication display, it is possible to greatly improve the operation desire in judging the game continuation and to improve the interest of the game .

  Then, when the state of the state indication display changes in stages according to the operation amount, it is possible to determine in the operable period whether the operation is sufficient, so that the adjustment of the operation amount in the operable period becomes possible. The burden on the person and the load on the operation button 25 can be reduced.

One Form of Second Embodiment
The following may be mentioned as representative of the second embodiment of the present invention.

  (19) A special variation winning device capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the game and converted from a closed state to an open state during the round game in the special gaming state, and an image In the gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying, a first open period in which the open state is open for a short time and a period longer than the first open period are set in the period converted to the open state. A second opening period can be set, and a first winning number display means for displaying the number of winning balls won in the special variation winning device in the first opening period in the round game, and the round game in The second winning number display means for displaying the number of winning balls that have won on the special variation winning device in the second opening period; and the second winning ball number display means is in all rounds after the end of the round game Second opening of The number of winning balls in a period is displayed, and the first number-of-winning-balls displaying means simultaneously displays a portion of the number of winning balls in the first opening period in all the rounds simultaneously with the second number-of-winning balls number displaying means; A game machine comprising an additional display means for displaying the remaining number of winning balls.

  (20) lottery means for performing a lottery each time a prize is awarded to the special variation prize device in the first open period, and one of a plurality of benefits which can be given to the player is lottery by the lottery means The gaming machine according to (19), wherein one of the plurality of benefits is a display by the additional display means.

  (21) An operation means for receiving an operation by a player is provided, and when the operation means receives a predetermined amount of operation in a predetermined period in the special gaming state, a probability state after the end of the special gaming state is notified. The gaming machine according to (19) or (20), characterized in that a state suggestion effect in which a suggestion character is displayed is executed.

  (22) A coating is displayed on the suggested character such that the content of the suggested character can not be viewed, but the coating is gradually released according to the amount of operation of the operating means (21) The gaming machine described.

  According to the invention of (19), by performing the additional effect, the player can be given a sense of profit, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the invention of (20), since the lottery of the benefit is performed for each winning in the short opening, the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the invention of (21), when the operation means receives a predetermined amount of operation, the player can urge the player to operate the operation means in order to execute the state indication effect, and the active participation in the game is accompanied. An improvement in interest is expected.

  According to the invention of (22), since the covering according to the suggested character is gradually released in accordance with the operation amount, the player is urged to operate the operation means, and depending on the player, the state with an arbitrary operation amount Since it is possible to enjoy the suggestive effects, it is expected to improve the interest associated with active participation in the game.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 90 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec). Since the control content by the game control device 100 is common to all the embodiments, it is not described in which embodiment the process is executed.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 89A and 89B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****".

  As shown in FIG. 89A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). Program of secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer The standby time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the system starts up normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 260 via the port and the data bus ( A1008) It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. It judges (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when no power failure occurs, the game control device 100 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control apparatus 100 can read and write RWM (read-write such as RAM or EEPROM). Memory access is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 executes checksum calculation processing for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019) Then, it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result at A 1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A 1021 of FIG.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”) Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 of FIG. 89B and initialization processing is performed. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 checks the area storing the gaming state in the RWM, and determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not in the high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1023 and step A1024, and shifts to the processing of step A1025. Also, when the gaming state is a high probability state (result of A 1022 is "Y"), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A 1023), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50 The (error indicator) on (lit) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (A1025), step A1031 Execute the process

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018 and A1020, the game control apparatus 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of the RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo area and the effect mode. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the processing of step A1031.

  Note that the command for power failure recovery sent in the process of step A1025 and the command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1030 are model specification commands indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special views 1 and 2 The decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command and the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command which show the number, and the probability information command which shows the state of probability are included. In addition, depending on the state of power off or power on, if the special view variation display game is being executed at the time of power off, the recovery screen command, if it is waiting for the customer at power off, the customer waiting demo command If it is initialized at power on, it includes a power on command. Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode depending on the model, and a time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included. The command at the time of RAM initialization also includes a command for RAM initialization.

  The game control apparatus 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of common drawing (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol for common drawing (per symbol random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1033), and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is the processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing).

  In the jackpot symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1035, the game control apparatus 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 260 is read and checked via the port and data bus (A1036). It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number update process (A1035), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by being made to wait by the value random number update process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in step A1035, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is updated in both. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is still on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. It determines (A1038). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1038 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is inhibited (A1039), and off data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 260 supplies power to various devices, and the power supply device 260 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capturing of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the emission permission signal is output by the output processing being performed, and the emission permission signal is set to be in the permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in the various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (front frame or A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether the glass frame is opened (A1308).

  Furthermore, the special figure game process which performs the process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1309), and then the popular figure game process which performs the process related to the popular figure variation display game is performed (A1310).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1311).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1313).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that although restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically at the time of timer interrupt processing return, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after external information editing processing. It is also possible to carry out the processing to be performed and the processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the input process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the output process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) the off data to the port 135 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A1610), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information / fire permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1612). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1613).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A 1615). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616), the output process ends.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, and the special drawing fluctuation display based on the winnings A game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the game. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the gaming ball with the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (subtracts 1) (A 2603). The special view game processing timer is clocked by an interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2619.

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number when the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure game process number is made, and the game branching process according to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, and sets the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, setting of the effect, Special figure normal processing is executed to set information required to perform special figure variation processing (A2608). The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special view, sets the information necessary for performing the special view display process, etc. The process during the figure fluctuation is executed (A2609).

  When the game processing number of the game control number 100 is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each big hit The special figure display process is executed to set the fan fare time in accordance with the special winning opening pattern, and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process (A2610).

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A2611).

  If the game processing number is “4” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A2612).

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A2613).

  When the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special view routine process (A2614). The details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "7" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hit, etc. Perform a small hit fanfare medium process (A2615). The details of the small hit fanfare medium process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball process (A2616).

  When the game processing number is “9” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing small hit end processing (A2617).

  When the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hitting end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special view ordinary processing (A2618).

  When the processing based on the special view game process number is completed, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special view 1 display The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control processing concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2701), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A 2702), and determines whether there is a winning for the starting winning opening 36 It is determined (A2703). If there is no winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is in the short (in the general power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the special control time is not in the middle (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A2707 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is in the special view time short (during general power support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2705), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the driver hits the start winning opening 36 left, and does not win the normal fluctuation prize device 37 unless the driver hits the right. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the general electric power support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-hand driving, but there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the general electric power support state (that is, (In the case of left-handed), the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed operation by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special view start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a prize monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hard random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning for the second starting winning opening It is determined (A2711). If there is no winning on the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning on the second start winning opening (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated to be in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (A2712). If the ordinary motor-operated combination is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the common electric charge is in progress (A2713). If the number of incorrect winnings on the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric power is in the process of being created. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball is in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a game ball which has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect prizes. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  After the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) when the common electric power fraud is not occurring (result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) The special view starting opening switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Also, when it is determined in A2713 that a common power charge is in progress (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A 2702, A 2710) in the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets start-up-no-commitment absence information indicating that there is no start-up opening winning (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input on the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  If there is an input to the target switch (result of A2802 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register), and whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

  If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and the start opening The start-up winning combination information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). In addition, the prepared big hit random number is used by special figure starting opening switch common processing.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs the information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of starting opening signal outputs is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (A2904), and the process shifts to processing of step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is performed. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of to-be-updated special views (number of starting memories) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit. It is determined (A2905). If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914 ).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special view holding information determination process (A2916). Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special view reservations as a rendering command (A2917), execute the rendering command setting process (A2918), and common to the special view starting opening switch. End the process.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (A2916) in the starting opening switch common process will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view hold information determination process. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetching (pre-judging) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during the general electric support state) (A3002).

  If the special control time is short (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special view hold information determination process. On the other hand, when the special drawing time is not in progress (the result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A3003). If the jackpot is medium or small (medium as a result of A 3003 is “Y”), the processing for determining the special feature reservation information ends.

  On the other hand, when the big game control device 100 is not in the big hit medium or small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit decision processing which decides whether it is the big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value. Is executed (A3004). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (A3006), and in the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of out is set (A3013), it moves to the processing of step A3014.

  When it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not The hit determination processing is executed (A3009). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is "N"), stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process shifts to the process of step A3014. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to a target starting opening switch and stop symbol information (A3014), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017) ).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a performance command a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a first half fluctuation number indicating a first half fluctuation pattern and a second half fluctuation number indicating a second half fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation pattern of a special figure fluctuation display game (A3018 ), The rendering command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special map hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the special winning opening open process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress. It determines (A3102).

  When the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (the result of A3105 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed. (A3103). When the small hitting medium is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the small hit is not being processed (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A3105. Then, 0 is set to the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one large winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3110). When the special winning opening switch 1 is input (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3107), and a rendering command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3110).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3110 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (A3111). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3111 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3111 is "N") It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3112).

  If the game control device 100 is in the small ball remaining ball processing (result of A3112 is "Y"), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, if the small ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3112 is " N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the large winning opening count number (A3113), the large winning opening count number is the upper limit value (number of gaming balls that can be winning in one round. For example," 9 " ) It is judged whether or not it becomes more than (A3114).

  When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3114 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3115), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3116) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (A3117).

  When the game control device 100 is not processing during the small hit (the result of A3117 is "N"), the large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when processing during the small hit is during processing (the result of A3117 is "Y") The value of the small hit opening end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3118), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the number of special views 2 reservations (the second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3206). Then, when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3211), and the customer waiting demo is not started (A3211) If the result is “N”, the waiting for customer demonstration flag is set in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (A3212).

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a rendering command (A3213), performs rendering command setting processing (A3214), and executes special processing transition processing setting processing 1 (A3215). The figure usually ends processing. On the other hand, in step A3211, when the customer waiting demo has been started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 is executed (A3215), and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  In addition, when special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is N), game control control 100 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202), the special feature 2 which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number A figure reserve number command (decorative special figure 2 reserve number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3204). Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing of special drawing 2 is executed (A3205), and the special drawing routine processing is ended.

  In addition, when special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), game control control 100 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3207), the special feature 1 which corresponds to special figure 1 reservation number A figure holding number command (decorative special figure 1 holding number command) is prepared as a rendering command (A3208), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A3209). Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing of special drawing 1 is executed (A3210), and the special drawing routine processing is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (A3215) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 1. In addition, the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 is executed even during the special figure display process described later.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "0" related to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (A3301), saves the processing number in the special processing game processing number area (A3302), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area Clear it (A3303). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3304), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special view normal process will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 change start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special view information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405 ).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3406). Details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Finally, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process of setting information on the fluctuation start of the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special view 1 fluctuation start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the special view 2 change start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (A 3503). Further, special drawing information setting processing for setting special drawing information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). Finally, the variation start information setting process for setting information on the variation start of the special view 2 variation display game is executed (A3507), and the special view 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the misplacement information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the misplacement information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A 3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3605).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is "N"), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value The small hit determination processing to determine whether or not is executed (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. End the process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 1 variable display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this processing, processing similar to the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 103 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves shift information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (A 3702), the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3704).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the big hit flag 2 is saved. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value (A3801), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3802). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A3807) and ends the jackpot judgment processing Do.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (probability state). (A3803). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (A3805).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hitting determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (A3901). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit.

  Naturally, the range of small hit judgment values (between the small hit lower judgment value and the small hit upper judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not uniquely provided, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination, but a unique small hit random number may be provided.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a gap as a judgment result (A3903), small hit The determination process ends.

  In addition, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100, the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judged value It is determined whether it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), a gap is set as a judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table corresponding to the current probability state and the high probability continuation number is set (A4003). In addition to the high probability state / low probability state, the probability states here include general power support state / non-general power support state.

  Here, the high probability continuation number is a continuous number of times when the special figure high probability state (certain change state) is reached after the big hit state ends, and the definite change big hit repeated without passing the special figure low probability state (normal game state or time saving state) It corresponds to the number of repetitions of. The high probability continuation number is updated in the jackpot end processing described later. After the high probability continuation frequency reaches a specified number of times (for example, 2 times), a special figure big hit symbol table is set such that only a normal big hit, which is a special figure low probability state after the big hit state ends, occurs. That is, the number of probability variation big hits is limited to a prescribed number of times. In the present embodiment, that the high probability continuation number reaches a specified number (for example, 2 times) and the probability change big hit is prohibited in the next big hit is referred to as “limiter operation”, and the high probability number For example, before reaching the next big hit after reaching 2), only the probability variation big hit occurs, so the "limiter is not activated".

  Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit). In addition, the details of the special figure big hit symbol table will be described later.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the probability fluctuation determination data area (A4008). The probability fluctuation determination data includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, number of times of power support) of the general charge support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state. Information is included. In addition, when the probability state after the end of the jackpot state is high probability, the probability fluctuation determination data also includes information of the high probability fluctuation number described later.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end processing described later. That is, it is possible to shift the effect mode on the occasion of a big hit by the effect mode shift information. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (probable variation big hit symbol / normal big hit pattern or not etc), so the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit), big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode to be shifted later will change. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the effect mode is also influenced by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress. For example, as will be described later, if it is a big hit symbol in the special figure high probability state (probable variation state) at present (ie if it is at limiter operation), the special effect mode (special effect mode, specific effect after the normal big hit ends) Mode).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and a small hit (a result of A4011). "Y"), small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode shift information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A 4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to a small hit. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016) and the off stop symbol pattern is stopped symbol pattern Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4020). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4021), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4022), and special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101). If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 pending) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table corresponding to the current probability state and the high probability continuation number is set (A4103). In addition to the high probability state / low probability state, the probability states here include general power support state / non-general power support state. The high probability continuation number is updated in the jackpot end processing described later. Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit). In addition, the details of the special figure big hit symbol table will be described later.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the probability fluctuation determination data area (A4108). The probability fluctuation determination data includes information on the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the number of continued games of the general charge support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit end processing described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A 4110) and the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4114). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4115) and clear 0 of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4116) and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special drawing information setting processing. The probability states (low probability / high probability, with / without short time) do not affect the distribution of the variation, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the variation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the total number of rounds in a big hit of one set (described later), the probability state, the presence or absence of a short time state, the progress of the special view variation display game, etc. It is supposed to be.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the first half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (A 4203), and the target special drawing reserve number (special figure 1 reserve number or special figure 2 reserve number) and offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are acquired (A 4204) .

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 adds the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. Since the effect mode is based on the total number of rounds, the variable distribution information 1 is also based on the total number of rounds. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a second half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A4207), and acquires a second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the number of the special figure reservations and the stop symbol pattern of interest are acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special drawing information. End the process. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. Since the effect mode is based on the total number of rounds, the variable distribution information 2 is also based on the total number of rounds. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the variation pattern setting process.

  The fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reaching state, and the second half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4302), the target variation pattern random number Load the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from 1 storage area (for number of reservations 1) and prepare (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the result of the special view variation display game is an out (A4304), and in the case of an out (a result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305) Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If not (when the result of A4304 is “N”), the distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (the second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (pending Load the variation pattern random number 2 from the equation 1) and prepare (A4308). Then, distribution processing is executed (A4309), and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (A4310). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). Thereafter, distribution processing (A4315) is performed, and the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (A4316), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the addition value in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as a rendering command (A4609), and rendering command setting processing is performed (A4610) ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free space after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure variation. The special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is executed at step A3210 in the special figure ordinary process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as the processing number (A4701), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A4702).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer wait demo flag area (A 4703), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 in the test signal output data area (A 4704). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A4705), and start the blink control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) initial value (for example, special figure 1 blink control timer area) 100 ms) is set (A4606). After that, the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process (special figure 2) during special figure variation. The special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is executed at step A3205 in the special figure ordinary process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as the processing number (A4801), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A4802).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A4803), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4804). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4805), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, the initial value (for example, the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) 100 ms) is set (A4806). After that, the process transition setting process (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation is ended.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during a special figure change.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4901), and saves the set display time in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A4902). In the case of this embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is In the case of a small hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time.

  Subsequently, the processing for setting transition to processing during special image display is executed (A4903), and the processing during special image display is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
Next, the details of the processing for transition to special processing being displayed in the special processing for fluctuation processing (A 4903) will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during the special view display.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a process number "2" related to the special figure display process (A5001), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5002).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A5003), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A 5003) A5004).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special view variation display game for output to the external information terminal (A5005).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. Save to (A5006). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag region (A5007) , Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during special view display. FIG. 116A shows the first half of the special view display processing, and FIG. 116B shows the second half of the special view display processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A5101), and clears the small hit flag area of the RWM (A5102). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded And clears the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM (A 5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105), and if it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is “Y”), the second special figure fluctuation display game of big hit Test signal related to the start of (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during continuous operation device operation, signal ON for special symbol 2) in test signal output data area of RWM After saving (A5108), a round number upper limit table is set (A5109).

  On the other hand, if the result of the check of the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (result of A5105 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5106), If there is a case (result of A5106 is "Y"), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the feature continuous operation device operating) regarding the start of the big hit (special image 1 large hitting) of the first special view fluctuation display game The signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table is executed (A5109).

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (4, 8, 12 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the RWM round number upper limit value area (A5110) . Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 adds the current round number upper limit value to the total round number, and saves it in the total round number area (A5112). Here, the total number of rounds is the total number of rounds in one set of jackpots (a certain number of probability variation big hits and one regular big hit). Subsequently, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared as a presentation command (A5113), and presentation command setting processing is executed (A5114). After that, a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is made the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a rendering command (A5115), The setting process is executed (A5116). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the high probability continuation number and the round number upper limit is prepared as a rendering command (A5117), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A5118). As described above, the fanfare command includes information on the high probability continuation number, and the high probability continuation number is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the fanfare command.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common drawing variation display game and the special drawing variation display game in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A5119). In the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, ON / OFF of 2 signals of a hit and 3 signals of a big hit is decided by the state of a big winning opening opening information and a probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when there is a big hit with popped out (big winning opening open information is other than the big winning opening open information 1), a big hit without popping out (so-called hit, etc.) If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, it will be off otherwise. Also, the jackpot 3 signal is on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball, and is off when the jackpot is a jackpot without a ball.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 performs the big hit fanfare time (e.g., 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of being hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game. Is set (A5120), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5121). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5122). As a result, information on the probability state of the special view and the time saving state (general power support state) when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the large winning opening (special variation winning device 39) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (A5123), the large corresponding to the large winning opening opening information A fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5124). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5125), and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 39 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A5106 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5126). If the small hit flag is a small hit (result of A5126 is "Y"), the high probability change number updating process of updating the high probability change number of managing the execution number of the special figure change display game in the special figure high probability state The process is executed (A5127), and the time reduction variation count updating process of updating the time reduction variation count (time reduction count) for managing the execution count of the special view variation display game in the time saving state (general power support state) is executed (A5128). Subsequently, presentation mode information check processing relating to setting of the presentation mode is executed (A5129), and it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the general-purpose support state) (A5130).

  If the game control device 100 is not in a special drawing time reduction (the result of A5130 is "N"), it loads the decorative special drawing command from the decorative special drawing command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5131), effect command setting processing (A5132). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5133), an effect command setting process is executed (A5134), and the process proceeds to step A5135.

  In addition, when the special control time is short (the result of A5130 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A5135. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the special view time is short (in the general power support state), the occurrence of the small hit opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of the small hit is the player In order to prevent the user from being aware of it, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5135). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (A5136) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5126 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the high probability change count update process (A5137), the time reduction change count update process (A5138), and sets the effect mode The presentation mode information check process related to is executed (A5139). Then, the switching preparation remaining rotation number (switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the rendering mode number is set (A5140), and the rendering remaining rotation number (the rendering remaining game number) matches the switching preparation remaining rotation number. It is determined whether or not (A5141). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.

  The game control device 100 executes special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (A5144), when special production normal processing transition setting processing 1 is performed, when the effect remaining rotational speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotational speed (A5144). End the process.

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the effect mode switching preparation command as the effect command (A5142), when the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number coincide with each other (the result of A5141 is “Y”). After the command setting process (A5143) is performed, the special figure transition process setting process 1 (FIG. 100) is executed (A5144), and the special figure display process is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, It is possible to avoid contradiction etc. in the production across the modes.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, details of the high probability variation count updating process (A5127, A5137) in the special view display process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the high probability variation count update process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability (during a probability change state) is in progress (A5201). If the special figure height probability is not in progress (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  If the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (the result of A5201 is "Y"), whether the number of times of high probability fluctuation which manages the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure high probability state is 0 It is determined whether or not it is (A5202). If the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (the result of A5202 is “Y”), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. In the big hit end processing described later, when the high probability state (probable change state) continues until the next big hit, the high probability fluctuation number is set to 0, and the processing after A5202 (processing to set the low probability flag Not included). Also, even after the number of times of high probability variation has become 0, the processing after A5202 is not executed.

  When the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A5202 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the high probability fluctuation number by −1 (subtracts 1) (A5203), and the high probability fluctuation number is 0 It is determined whether it has become (A5204). If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A 5204 is “N”), that is, if the high probability state continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  In the case where the number of times of high probability fluctuation is 0 (the result of A 5204 is “Y”), that is, when the high probability state is ended in the special figure fluctuation display game of this time, the game control apparatus 100 is a high probability notification flag Clear the area (A5205) and save the signal related to the end of the high probability state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A5206 ).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the power transmission support state) (A5207). When the special figure time reduction is not in progress (the result of A5207 is "N"), the special figure low probability & time reduction none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5208), and the high probability change number update process is ended. As a result, the special figure high probability state ends, and the normal gaming state (low probability state and no general power support) is achieved. On the other hand, when the special figure time is short (the result of A5207 is "Y"), the special figure low probability & time shortness flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209), and the high probability change number updating process is ended. . As a result, the special figure high probability state ends, and a short time state (low probability state and general power support) is achieved.

[Time reduction variation update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation number update process (A5128, A5138) in the special view display process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the time reduction variation update process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the power transmission support state) (A 5301). When the special drawing time is not being reduced (the result of A5301 is “N”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

  In addition, when the special control time is short (the result of A5301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 manages the number of times the special view change display game is executed in the short time state (general power support state). It is determined whether the number is 0 (A5302). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5302 is “Y”), the processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations is ended. In addition, in the big hit end processing described later, when the time saving (general power support state) continues until the next big hit, the number of time shortening fluctuation number is set to 0, and the processing after A 5302 (processing to set flag with no time saving) Not included). Also, even after the number of times of time reduction variation has become 0 once, the processing after A5302 is not executed.

  In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5302 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by −1 (A5303), and the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes 0 or not Is determined (A5304). If the time reduction variation number is not 0 (the result of A5304 is "N"), that is, if the time saving state (general power support state) continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the time reduction variation number update process finish.

  On the other hand, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5304 is “Y”), that is, when the time saving state is ended in the current special feature fluctuation display game, game control control 100 relates to the time reduction end. A signal (for example, 2 jacks off) is saved in the external information output data area (A5305). And the signal regarding the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal Is off, and the normal electric utility 1 release extension state signal is off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5306).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number with no time saving in the game state display number area to turn off the second game state display unit 58 (A5307), and saves the low probability flag in the common-play game mode flag area. (A5308). As a result, the time saving state (general power support state) of the general view variation display game is ended.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure height probability is in progress (during a probability change state) (A5309). If the special figure height probability is not in progress (the result of A5309 is "N"), the low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5310), and the process proceeds to step A5312. As a result, the time saving state of the special view variation display game ends, and the normal gaming state (low probability state, and time saving, no general power support) is achieved. If the special figure height probability is in progress (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the high probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5311), and the process proceeds to step A5312. As a result, the time saving state (general power support state) of the special view variation display game is ended, and the latent probability change state (special figure high probability state, and time saving / general power support not available) is achieved.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is off) in the test signal output data area (A 5312) to turn off the first gaming state display unit 57. The number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5313), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5129, A5139) in the special view display process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special view variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or break).

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is the no update code (A5401). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (the result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not the code without update (the result of A5401 is “N”), the game control device 100, the remaining number of rotations, which is the number of executable times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining number of revolutions has become 0 (A5403). If the effect remaining number of rotations is not zero (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is ended. Also, when the effect remaining number of rotations becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (A5405).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and obtains the remaining effect rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, the game is saved in the effect remaining rotation number area in the RWM (A5407), next mode shift information of the effect mode to shift is acquired, and saved in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (A5408). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5410). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A 5410 is “Y”), that is, if the state of probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

  If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5411 And effect command setting processing (A5412). Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether the new rendering mode is a left-strike mode (A5417), and if it is not a left-strapping mode (the result of A5417 is "N"), the rendering mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (the result of A5417 is "Y"), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A5418), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5419), the rendering mode End the information check process. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (A5125) in the special chart display process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 during fanfare / interval.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "3" which is a processing number relating to fanfare / interval processing (A5501), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 signal on big hit (output in big hit + small hit), 4 signal on big hit (output in big hit) external information Save to the output data area (A5503), signals about the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (eg, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (A5505), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5506). The general drawing low probability flag is saved (A5507).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the variable symbol determination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511), and the special view fluctuation display executable in the high probability state Clear the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of games (A5512). Thus, the high probability state and the short time state (general power support state) are ended.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode 1 number in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is on) relating to a right-handed command in the test signal output data area (A5516) and turn on the display LED (for example, first gaming state display unit 57) during right-handed In order to cause the game state display number 2 area to save the number in the right-handed state (A5517), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (A5136) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1;

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "7" for the small hit fanfare middle processing as the processing number (A5601), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A 5603), and the signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, 1 large hit signal ON ( Save the big hit + small hit))) in the external information output data area (A 5604), and save the signal related to the start of the small hit game (eg, special symbol 1 small hit signal on) in the test signal output data area (A5605).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears the special winning opening illegal prize number area (A5606), and saves the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5607). Then, save the signal related to the right-handed command (the firing position designation signal 1 is on) in the test signal output data area (A5608), and turn on the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) The game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (A5609), and the small hitting fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (A2611) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fanfare / during interval processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702), and effects command The setting process (A5703) is performed.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds for long opening, 0.2 seconds for short opening) in the special view game processing timer area (A 5704), and the special winning opening opening process is performed. The migration setting process is executed (A5705), and the fanfare / interval process is ended.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing setting process transition setting during the special winning opening open. The special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is executed in step A5705 in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the processing number to "4" for the processing during the big winning opening opening (A5801), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5802). After that, save the signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the signal during special electric combination 1 operation is ON) in the test signal output data area (A5803) and store the number of winnings to the special winning opening The information in the mouth count number area is cleared (A5804). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5805), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening open process (A2612) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening open process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A5901). Then, if it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), save the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5902), and the interval command concerning the interval between rounds It prepares as an effect command (A5903), and executes effect command setting processing (A5906).

  When it is the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the remaining ball processing time (for the final) (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5904), An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of ending the special gaming state is prepared as a rendering command (A5905), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A5906).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (A5907), and ends the special winning opening open processing.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process. The special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process is executed in step A5907 in the special winning opening open process shown in FIG.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets the processing number to "5" related to the special winning opening residual ball processing (A6001), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6002). Thereafter, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6003), and the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (the result of A6101 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the interval time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special figure game processing timer area ( A6102) The fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 is executed (A6103), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6101 is "Y"), the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived. (A6104), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and stop symbol pattern (A6105), and save the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A6106) . Thereafter, the big hit end process shift setting process (A6107) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the fan transfer / interval process transfer setting process 2. The process transfer setting process 2 during fanfare / interval is executed at step A6103 in the special winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "3" which is a processing number relating to fanfare / interval processing (A6201), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6202).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is turned off) regarding the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) in the test signal output data area (A6203) , End of processing transition setting processing 2 during fanfare / interval.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end process shift setting process. The big hit end process shift setting process is executed at step A6107 in the big winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "6" as a process number related to the big hit end process (A6301), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6302). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is turned off) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6303).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (A6304), and clears the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state Then, (A6305), clear the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (A6306). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (A6307), and the information of the big winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the big winning opening Is cleared (A6308), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process. FIG. 129A shows the first half of the big hit end process, and FIG. 129B shows the second half of the big hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a special view game mode flag corresponding to the probability variation determination data set in step A4008, and saves it in the special view game mode flag area (A6401). Here, the special view game mode flag indicates the probability state and the presence or absence of time saving (general power support) after the end of the big hit state. Subsequently, the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) corresponding to the probability fluctuation determination data is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region of RWM (A6402). When the high probability state (probable change state) continues to the next big hit after the big hit state ends, the high probability variation number (initial value) is set to zero. On the other hand, in the case of an ST (special time) machine or the like, when the high probability state (probability change state) continues by a predetermined game number (for example, 100) after the big hit state ends, the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) For example, it is set to 100).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the number of time shortening fluctuations (initial value) corresponding to the probability fluctuation determination data in the area of time shortening fluctuation (A 6403). The time shortening fluctuation number (initial value) is set to 0 when the short time (general power support state) continues until the next big hit after the big hit state ends. On the other hand, if the time saving state (general power support state) continues for the predetermined number of games (100 or 50 in the present embodiment) after the big hit state ends, the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value) is the predetermined number of games (100 or 50) Set to).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a common drawing game mode flag corresponding to the probability fluctuation determination data, and saves it in the common drawing game mode flag area (A6404). The regular drawing game mode flag set here indicates the probability state (high probability / low probability) of the regular drawing game after the end of the jackpot state. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is reached after the big hit (A6405).

  If the game control device 100 does not enter the high probability state after the big hit ends (the result of A6405 is “N”), the signal related to the low probability (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal Then, the high probability continuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (A6407), and the process proceeds to step A6410. On the other hand, if the high probability state is reached after the big hit end (the result of A6405 is "Y"), the signal regarding the start of high probability (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is on) Is saved in the test signal output data area (A6408), and the high probability continuation number indicating the number of consecutive times that becomes the high probability state after the big hit state is updated by 1 (add 1) (A6409), and the processing moves to step A6410. Do.

  Then, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is time reduction (with general-purpose electric power support) after the big hit (A6410). If there is no time saving after the big hit (general power support) (result of A6410 is "N"), save the signal related to no time saving (for example, big hit 2 signal off) in the external information output data area (A6411), time not saving Are saved in the test signal output data area (A6412) (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is off). Then, save the number without time saving in the gaming state display number area to turn off the second gaming state display unit 58 (A6413), and test the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) The game data is saved in the output data area (A6414), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area to turn off the first game state display unit 57 (A6415), and the process proceeds to step A6419.

  On the other hand, when there is a short time (general power support) after the big hit end (game result of "A6410 is" Y "), the game control apparatus 100 has a signal related to the start of the short time (for example, two big hit signals) in the external information output data area Save the signal (A6416), the signal related to the start of the short time (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal is on, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal is on, the normal symbol 1 high probability status signal is on) test signal The output data area is saved (A6417), the game state display number area is saved with a time-saving number (A6418), and the process proceeds to step A6419. In addition, here, since the jackpot is hit from the middle, the setting regarding the hit is not performed.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets an effect mode information address table corresponding to the total number of rounds calculated in step A5112 (A6419), and effects set in the stop symbol setting process (especially A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. Acquires the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (A6420), acquires and saves the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) (A6421) . Thereby, based on the total number of rounds (total number of rounds, total number of rounds) in one set of the big hit (specified number of probability variation big hits and one normal big hit), it is possible to select a rendering mode to which transition is made after the big hit ends.

  As described above, the effect mode transition information (A4009, A4109) can shift to the special effect mode after the normal big hit end at the time of limiter operation. For example, one of a plurality of special effect modes (for example, a premier appearance rate UP mode, a RUSH mode, and a pseudo continuous appearance rate UP mode described later) based on the total number of rounds after the normal big hit end at the time of limiter operation. You can select and transition to this. Then, as described above, the fluctuation distribution information 1 (A4206) for distributing the first half fluctuation and the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A4212) for distributing the second half fluctuation are set based on the effect mode, and the fluctuation pattern is set. Since the variation pattern table can be selected in the process, the variation pattern table and hence the variation pattern can be selected based on the total number of rounds.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6422), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The next mode transition information of is acquired and saved (A6423).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6424), and saves the prepared probability information command as a demonstration command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6425) ), Effect command setting processing is executed (A6426). Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the presence or absence of time saving (general power support), and information of the effect mode. For example, in the case of a normal big hit end at the time of limiter operation, "low probability · time reduction · premiere appearance rate UP mode", "low probability · time reduction · RUSH mode based on the total number of rounds as a probability information command There is a “low probability, time short, pseudo continuous appearance rate UP mode”.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6427), and executes an effect command setting process (A6428). Then, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared as an effect command (A6429), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6430).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is time saving (general power support) after the big hit ends (A6431). If there is a time delay (general power support) (result of A6431 is "Y"), the processing shifts to step A6434. If there is no time reduction (general power support) (result of A6431 is "N"), prepare a left-handed command notification command as a rendering command (A6432), execute rendering command setting processing (A6433), and for the processing of step A6434. Transition.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the game is in a high probability state after the big hit (A 6434). When it is in the high probability state after the big hit end (the result of A 6434 is “Y”), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 2 is executed (A 6436). If it is not in the high probability state after the big hit end (the result of A 6434 is “N”), the total round number area is cleared to 0 (A 6435), and special image processing shift setting processing 2 is executed (A 6436).

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary process transition setting process 2. The special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 is executed in step A6436 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” as a process number related to the special figure normal process (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal off, the big hit 3 signal off, the big hit 4 signal off) in the external information output data area (A6503). Save the signal about the end (for example, the signal during condition device operation is off, the signal for commodity continuous operation device is off, the signal for special symbol 1 is off, the signal for special symbol 2 is off) in the test signal output data area (A6504). Then, the probability fluctuation determination flag area is cleared (A6505).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information of the time reduction determination flag area (A6506), clears the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the round count of the big hit (A6507), and Clear the information (A 6508). Then, clear the information in the special view game mode flag save area (A6509), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6510), and finish the special processing shift processing setting process 2 Do.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (A2615) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the small hit fanfare process. As shown in FIG. 131, in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (A6601) is performed.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting medium processing shift setting process (A6601) in the small hitting fanfare medium process will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the small hit middle process transfer setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "8" for the small hit middle processing as the processing number (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (A6703), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, The special motorized part 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A 6704). Next, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the special variation winning device 39, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the number of winning to the large winning opening (A6706), and the small hitting middle control pointer area has a small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0"). ) (A6707), and the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the small hit middle process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the value of the small hit middle control pointer (A6801), and determines whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") (A6802) . If the loaded value is not equal to or less than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is “N”), the small hit middle control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), the small hit operation transition setting process is executed (A6804), small End processing during hit.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (the result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special view game mode flag save area (A6805), It is judged whether or not the flag is a flag related to the special figure height probability middle (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the small hit in the special map height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.

  When the loaded flag is a flag regarding the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the small hitting remaining ball processing transition setting process (A6809), and the small hitting middle process finish. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag regarding special drawing high probability (result of A6806 is "N"), prepare a small hit end screen command as a rendering command (A6807) and execute rendering command setting processing ( A6808) The small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing is executed (A6809), and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (A 6804) in the small hitting medium process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the small hitting operation shift setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes branch processing in accordance with the control pointer (small hit middle control pointer) (A6901). If the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, save the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special view game processing timer area (A6902), and save the off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hit operation shift setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the control pointer is 1, 3 or 5, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A 6904). The on data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

  Here, in the case of this embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing. . Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 ms closing is performed. The control pointer is updated to 1 during the small hit at the end (that is, when switching from the first closing of 1500 msec to the opening of the second 200 ms) and the control pointer is updated to 2 during the small opening of the second 200 msec. The control pointer is updated to 3 at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the control pointer is updated to 4 at the end of the third 200 ms opening, and the small hits at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. The middle control pointer is updated to five. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to 6, and the small hit state is ended after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the small hit ending time of 100 msec thereafter. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 msec after the fourth 200 msec opening, the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process (A6809) in the small hit middle process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the small ball remaining ball process transition setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "9" for small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (A7001), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A7002). Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A7003), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A7004), the small hit remaining The sphere process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A2617) in the special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 136, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (A7101) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (A7101) in the small hitting residual ball process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the small hitting end process transition setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "10" for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special figure game processing timer area (A7203), and a signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric bonus 1) Save the operation signal (off signal) in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information on the special winning opening count number area is cleared (A7205), the information on the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 clear) (A7206), and the small hit end processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the small hitting end process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the time saving state) (A7301). When the special drawing time is short (the result of A7301 is "Y"), the special drawing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 is executed (A7304), and the small hitting end processing is ended.

  When the special control time is not short (result of A7301 is "N"), game control control 100 saves the signal regarding the left hitting indication (for example, firing position specification signal 1 off) in the test signal output data area (A7302) In order to turn off the first game state display unit 57 (display LED in the right strike), save the number in the left strike state in the game state display number 2 area (A 7303), and set special process transition processing 3 Is performed (A7304), and the small hit termination process is ended.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (A7304) in the small hitting end process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary process transition setting process 3.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” for special processing as usual as a processing number (A7401), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A7402). Save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal off) in the external information output data area (A7403) and test the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal off) Save to the output data area (A7404).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information of the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A7405), clears the information of the effect mode transition information area (A7406), and clears the information of the special view game mode flag save area. (A7407). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7408), and the special processing routine processing shift setting processing 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect command setting processing for setting an effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

  If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A2304), and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to the process of step A2304.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the rendering command. End the process.

  As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 141 shows symbol variation control processing (A2620, A2622) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the normal symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the common drawing) is fluctuating (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

  The game control apparatus 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A 7503) when the variation flag according to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (the result of A7502 is "Y"). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the blink control timer to be controlled by -1 (A 7504), determines whether the blink control timer after the update is 0 (A 7505), and the blink control timer after the update When it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the display data which corresponds to the value of the fluctuation design number territory of control object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  If the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A 7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variation symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the 2-byte assignment process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether the data at the top of the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without allocation (ie, "0") (A4401). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

  Then, when the first data of the selection table (second half change group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of the distribution. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), one distribution initially defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) Obtain a value (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403 and Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random value already determined in the previous step A4405, and a new disturbance is generated. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the distribution process.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of the distribution process. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  The game control apparatus 100 first generates the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313) Is checked if it is a code without allocation (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  Then, if the game control apparatus 100 determines that the first data of the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is ended. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation One distribution value defined first in the group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A4303 or A4308 or A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503 and Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505 is obtained. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).

  When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which production control device 300 performs with the program for production control is explained.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The processes in the effect control device 300 are processes common to all the embodiments and modifications except for the round effect setting process, the ending effect setting process, and the effect content determination process, so the process executed in any embodiment I do not describe it.

  In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****". Further, as a modified example, a portion to which a part of processing is added or changed is represented as "C ****".

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, initialization of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 is executed (B0002, B0003), and an interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power on is saved in the area to be initialized (B 0007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0009). In the effect button input process, an effect button operation effect process to be described later is executed. Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting an operation such as a change in the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B0010). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process of executing addition and clearing of effect points (B0011). The details of the effect point control process are processes in which effect points are added by executing effects and operations to be added to effect points, and the effect such as at the end of the game so that effect points can be carried over to the next game In addition, for example, information including information on effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B0012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing (B 0013). The details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B 0014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing on the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending drawing command preparation is executed (B0015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B0015). When it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is "N"), the processing of B0016 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and when it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is "Y") The screen drawing is instructed (B 0017). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B 0018).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B0019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a bonus game operation presentation.

  Then, when the process of B0020 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0020 is repeated.

[Effect point control processing]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an effect point control process (B0011) performed in the main process described above. The effect point control process is a process of controlling the giving and exchanging of game points (the giving of items and the like).

  The effect control device 300 first executes point initialization processing to clear the gaming points to zero (B0101). When the player stops the game and waits for a customer, the game points generated in the game are reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes point update processing for updating the cumulative value of gaming points (B0102).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes point exchange processing for giving a privilege in exchange for gaming points, and ends this processing.

[Point initialization process]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a procedure of point initialization processing (B0101) performed in the above-mentioned effect point control processing.

  The effect control device 300 first acquires information on the state of the gaming machine 10 such as during the variable display game, in the special gaming state, waiting for a customer (B0201), and determines whether or not the customer waiting state ( B0202). Whether or not the customer waiting state is determined depending on whether the customer waiting flag is set, for example, a predetermined period elapses without the operation handle 24 being operated, and the number of starting memory displays is constant at zero. When the time period has elapsed, a customer waiting flag is set by transition to the power saving mode or the like.

  If the customer is not in the waiting state (the result of B 0202 is “N”), that is, if the game is in progress, the present process is ended without executing the point clear.

  When waiting for a customer (the result of B0202 is "Y"), the accumulated point value and the granted benefit are reset so that the player who plays the next game can not use the gaming point or the benefit of the immediately preceding player. (B0203, B0204), and the process ends.

[Point update processing]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing a procedure of point update processing (B 0102) performed in the above-mentioned effect point control processing.

  The effect control device 300 first acquires information on the state of the gaming machine 10 (B0301), and adds newly generated gaming points to the accumulated point value (B0302). Thereafter, the process ends.

[Point exchange process]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a procedure of point exchange processing (B 0103) performed in the above-mentioned effect point control processing.

  The effect control device 300 first acquires information on the state of the gaming machine 10 (B0401), and determines whether exchange with an item or the like is possible according to the accumulated gaming points (B0402). In determining whether exchange is possible, reference is made to a table (not shown) in which the number of points required for each item or benefit is defined.

  When the point exchange is possible (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the provided benefit selection operation flag is set (B0403). The award privilege selection operation flag is a flag set in B0406 described later, and the number of the item etc. to be exchanged is set.

  When the awarding bonus selection operation flag is not set (the result of B0403 is “N”), the effect control device 300 acquires the point cumulative value (B0404), and it is determined whether the point exchange condition is satisfied or not. It determines (B0405). The point exchange condition is determined based on whether the number of exchangeable points for each item or benefit has been reached and whether an exchange operation with an exchangeable item or the like has been received.

  If the point exchange condition is satisfied (the result of B0405 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the awarding bonus selection operation flag (B0406), and the present process is ended.

  If the award award selection operation flag is set (the result of B0403 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the award award has been determined (B0407). If the granted bonus is determined (the result of B0407 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the granted bonus (B0408) and clears the granted bonus selection operation flag (B0409). Next, the game point portion that has been digested is subjected to update processing (B0410), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when points can not be exchanged (the result of B0402 is “N”), when the point exchange condition is not satisfied (the result of B0405 is “N”), when the award is not determined (B0407) The result is “N”), and the process ends thereafter.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the received command check process (B0013) in the main process described above will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

  In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

  Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to be able to store up to 32 received commands. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the contents. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). Thereafter, it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received command loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), step The processes of B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is usually transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Ru. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). Then, if the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B 1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B 1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and there is a variation command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a change system command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of a big hit system command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a jackpot, for example, fanfare command (A5117), round command (A5702), interval command (A5903), It is an ending command (A5905) or the like. Then, if the MODE section indicates a big hit system command (the result of B 1207 is “Y”), the big hit system command process is executed (B 1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of the symbol system command (B1209). In addition, as a symbol system command, there is a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a one-shot system command (B1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B 1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol system command read ahead (B 1213) . The pre-reading symbol system command includes the pre-reading stop symbol command described above. Then, if the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “Y”), pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B 1214), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (B 1215) ). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B 1215 is “Y”), the prefetch change command process is executed (B 1216), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B 1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis process is ended.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special view type (special view 1 or special view 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is unconfirmed (B1901). If the special drawing type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received even though a variation system command of an off-set has been received. If the variation system command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B 1903 is “Y”), variation system command processing ends.

  If the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and the effect during variation is A change effect setting process for setting a certain change effect is executed (B1905). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special view variation is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Change production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described fluctuation system command process will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the change pattern type is change without reach (change that does not reach reach) (B2001). If the change pattern type is no reach change (the result of B2001 is “Y”), set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to point number, model code, special view type, effect mode (B2002), change The address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the system command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special view type is acquired (B2003). In the case of no reach fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, the table address corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not reach non-variation (the result of B 2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation control type is variation with reach, the effect control device 300 selects the number of points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, symbol type The corresponding first half notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

  After the steps B 2003 and B 2005, the effect control device 300 performs a drawing of a notice that appears during the first half of the movement (before reaching) (B 2006). Then, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of points, model code, special drawing type, effect mode, and symbol type (B2007), and the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variation system command The address of B2 is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for notice to appear during the second half change (during reach) is made (B2009). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time, the main reach contents, etc. are known from the fluctuation system command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). Thereafter, in accordance with the contents of the change production such as the reach production and the content of the notice production, the stop symbol of the decorative special view variable display game is determined (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattered eyes in the case of the off pattern

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the fluctuation effect (B2013), and performs display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special drawing type is performed, and for example, an animation is set in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special drawing that changes this time is reduced (B2015). Then, the voice number which defines the production | presentation aspect by a speaker, and the decoration number which determines the production | presentation operation | movement of a decoration apparatus are set (B2016).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B 2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the aforementioned first to third special symbols varying with the display device 41 The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (the fourth symbol) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the above-described lamp display device (LED) 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect content determination processing for determining whether to change the reach content or to replace, after determining up to the notice of the variable display game to be executed next. B2019). The effect content determination process will be described in detail after the description of the effect example.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the details of the big hit system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is a fanfare command, the effect control device 300 executes a fanfare effect setting process (B2102), The fanfare in progress flag is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2103), and this processing ends. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process (B2105), and the current gaming machine A game state flag indicating 10 game states (P machine states) is set to "round" (B2106), and this processing ends.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B 2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). If the MODE section indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process (B2108), and the current gaming machine During the interval is set in the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state of 10 (P machine state) (B2109), and this processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent an interval (the result of B 2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an ending ( B2110). If the MODE section indicates an ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), an ending effect setting process is executed (B2111), and the ending is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P state of the gaming machine 10). The setting is made (B2112), and this processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command is the big winning opening count. It determines (B2113). If the MODE section indicates the special winning opening count (the result of B2113 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the short opening is currently in progress (B2114). If the short opening is not being performed (the result of B2114 is “N”), the effect control device 300 updates the acquired game ball number counter (B2115), and ends this processing.

  If the game is in the short opening (the result of B2114 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs lottery to display the number of acquired balls (B2116), and does not display the acquired number of gaming balls or not It is determined (B2117). When the number of acquired game balls is not displayed (the result of B2117 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the non-display counter (B2118), and ends this processing. When the acquired gaming number of balls is not to be displayed (the result of B2117 is “N”), the effect control device 300 updates the short release pattern counter (B2119), and ends the present process.

  If the MODE section of the received big hit system command does not represent the big win count (the result of B2113 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute any processing, and the big hit system command processing Finish.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2105) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process performed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether the ACT part of the received big hit system command represents a big hit fanfare (B2201). If the ACT part of the big hit system command represents a big hit fanfare (the result of B2201 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a big hit fanfare command, the effect control device 300 updates the big hit number by +1 (B2202) The display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of big hits (B2203).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined display content (B2204), and determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit including short opening (B2205). If it is a big hit including a short opening (the result of B2205 is “Y”), the presentation control device 300 sets the short opening big hit information (B2206), and the production control device 300 causes a probability variation big hit based on the fanfare command. Or, the big hit type information regarding the big hit information such as the big hit normally is set (B2217), and this processing is ended. When it is not a big hit including the short opening (the result of B2205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing of B2217 and ends the present processing.

  If the ACT part of the received big hit system command does not represent a big hit fanfare (the result of B 2201 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the ACT part of the big hit system command represents a sudden fan fare. It determines (B2207). If the ACT part of the big hit system command represents a sudden fanfare (the result of B2207 is “Y”), that is, if it is a sudden fanfare command, the effect control device 300 determines that the current sudden hit is from a continuous effect. It is determined whether it is a hit (B2208). A sudden hit is a big hit without a ball (for example, 2R positive variation big hit), and a positive fanfare command may be provided in distinction from other big hit big hit fanfare commands.

  If the current hit is not the hit from the continuous effect (the result of B2208 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the effect corresponding to the probability state to the dedicated effect (B2209), B2217, The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is a sudden hit from the contact effect (the result of B2208 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 will draw out the random effect to be executed from among the random effect patterns related to the current dynamic effect. (B2210) The display of the determined positive effect is set (B2211), the process of B2217 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  If the ACT part of the received big hit system command does not represent the sudden fanfare (the result of B2207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 indicates that the ACT part of the big hit system command represents the small hit fanfare. It is determined whether or not (B2212). When the ACT part of the big hit system command represents a small hit fanfare (the result of B2212 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current small hit is a hit from a continuous effect ( B2213). If the small hit this time is not a small hit from the continuous effect (the result of B2213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the small hit dedicated effect corresponding to the probability state (B2214), The processing of B2217 is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is a small hit from the continuous effect (the result of B2213 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the small hit effect to be executed from among the small hit effect patterns related to the current fluctuating effect. A lottery is made (B2215), the display of the determined small hitting effect is set (B2216), and the process of B2217 is executed to end the present process.

  If the ACT part of the received big hit system command does not represent a small hit fanfare (the result of B 2212 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing.

[Round effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the round effect setting process (B2108) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect setting processing of the round second embodiment performed by the effect control device 300. The round effect setting process described here is executed in the second embodiment.

  Since the right hit is an advantage for the player during the big hit game, the presentation control device 300 first sets the display of the right hit instruction (B 2301), and whether the present big hit is a small hit or a sudden hit. Is determined (B2302). By providing the winning aiding means, even if it is a small hit, there is ample opportunity to win a large winning opening, so the display of a right-handed is displayed.

  If the current hit is a small hit or a sudden hit (the result of B 2302 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the small hit / probable round effect (B 2317), and displays the emphasizing effect displayed. Set (B2315). Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets a sound number and a decoration number based on the emphasized effect (B2316), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when the current hit is not a small hit or a sudden hit (the result of B 2302 is “N”), the effect control device 300 derives the number of rounds from the round command (B 2303), and opens short during the round command. It is determined whether there is a big hit information (B2304).

  If there is no short opening big hit information (the result of B2304 is “N”), the display of the number of acquired game balls based on the acquired game ball counter is set (B2305), and the display of the number of rounds is set (B2306) .

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the round effect of the long release pattern (B2307), and sets the sound number and the decoration number based on the long release pattern (B2308). Next, an effect mode transition process is performed to set a flag indicating whether the effect mode should be transitioned from the normal mode to another mode (B2309), and this process ends.

  If there is short opening big hit information (the result of B2304 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to short opening (predetermined round). (B2310). When it is not the predetermined number of rounds (the result of B2310 is "N"), since the round is a long open round, the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B2305, and ends the present processing.

  On the other hand, if the number of rounds is the predetermined number of rounds (the result of B 2310 is “Y”), the round is a short open round, so the effect control device 300 displays the round effect of the short open pattern. The setting is made (B2311), and the remaining open number is calculated from the upper limit value information of the round number and the round number (B2312).

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the number of remaining openings (B2313), and sets the display of the number of acquired game balls in the short opening based on the short opening pattern counter (B2314). Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets emphasis effect and sound number and decoration number (B2315, B2316), and ends this processing.

[Production mode transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the effect mode transition process (B2309) in the above-described round effect setting process will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect mode transition processing performed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the mode transition selection screen which allows the player to select the mode as the normal mode or another mode (for example, the tiger mode) (B2401), and the other mode (tiger mode) is selected. It is determined whether or not (B2402). When the tiger mode is selected (the result of B 2402 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the mode transition flag in the special view game mode flag area (B 2403), and ends this processing.

  If the tiger mode is not selected (the result of B2402 is "N"), the effect control device 300 clears the special view game mode flag area (B2404), and ends this processing. The same applies to the case where the player does not operate the mote selection.

[Interval production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, details of the interval effect setting process (B2111) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interval effect setting process performed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 sets a long open interval sound number and decoration number (B2501), and determines whether or not there is short open big hit information in the present big hit (B2502).

  If there is no short open jackpot information (the result of B 2502 is “N”), this processing ends. If there is short open jackpot information (the result of B 2502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of rounds is a predetermined number (B 2503). If the number of rounds is not the predetermined number (the result of B 2503 is “N”), this processing ends.

  If the number of rounds is a predetermined number (the result of B 2503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the short opening interval (B 2504) and sets the sound number and decoration number of the short opening interval. Set (B2505). Thereafter, the process ends.

[Ending effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the details of the ending effect setting process (B2117) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process performed by the effect control device 300. The ending effect setting process described here is executed in the second embodiment.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the jackpot type information set in the fanfare effect setting process (B2601), and the jackpot type information and selection rate loaded with reference to the tables shown in FIGS. 79 (A) and (B). The state indication display is set (B2602). The big hit type information is information on the type of big hit (fixed probability big hit or normal big hit) set in B2217. Further, the type of the suggested character (which face is the suggested character) is set by the process of B2602.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the loaded flag includes a mode transition flag (B2603). When the mode transition flag is present (the result of B 2603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the state indication display based on the substitution rate with reference to the table shown in FIG. 79 (C) (D) B2604). If the mode transition flag is not present (the result of B2603 is "N"), the process of B2604 is not executed because the state indication is not replaced.

  Next, the effect control device 300 calculates the total number of obtained game balls from the obtained game ball counter and the short release pattern counter (B2605), and sets the display of the added effect based on the total number of obtained game balls. (B2606).

  Next, the effect control device 300 resets the acquired gaming ball number counter, the counter for the short opening pattern, and the short opening jackpot information (B2607, B2608), and ends this processing.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special view type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol system command (the special decoration 1 command or the special decoration 2 command) (B1801). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In addition, for example, the symbol type is an off symbol or a bumping hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol (4R-A1 etc), 4R normal big hit symbol (4R-A2 etc), 8R true variation big hit symbol (8R-A1 etc), 8R normal It corresponds to a big hit symbol (8R-A2 etc.), a 12R probability variation big hit symbol (12R-A1 etc), a 12R normal big hit symbol (12R-A2 etc).

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, if the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). Then, if the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the decoration special view 1 reservation number command (A3208) or not. It is determined (B1309). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1310), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next, the MODE unit displays the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (A3203) It is determined whether or not to represent (B1311). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1312), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1313). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting processing is executed (B 1314), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command ( B1315). Examples of error / illegal commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a false notification is executed (B 1316), End one-shot command processing.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 causes the MODE unit to be a command for effect mode switching (for example, the A5142 effect). It is determined whether or not the mode switching preparation command is displayed (B1317). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command. (B1319). The command for symbol stop includes, for example, the symbol stop command of the special view 1 and the symbol stop command of the special view 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1320).

  If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1320 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special view (B1321), and the game is performed after all symbols have been stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1322), and the one-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1324, as an example, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which the present process is executed, the gaming state flag is a flag of "under fluctuation", "big hit", "small hit" Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent a command for symbol stop (the result of B1319 is "N") or when the command of the MODE unit is not normal (the result of B1320 is "N"), the effect control device In step 300, the one-shot command processing ends.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the details of the pre-read symbol system command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (special view 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decoration special view hold number command is the number of special view 1 hold It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) to the special view 1 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special view 1 hold count Save (B1602).

  If the latest hold information is not the information of the special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “N”), that is, the decoration special view hold number command received most recently is the decoration special view 2 hold number command In the case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

  After steps B 1602 and B 1603, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation system command reception wait flag indicating that the reception of the prefetch fluctuation system command is awaited (B 1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are set, so the pre-reading variation system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol system command processing ends.

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, details of the prefetch change system command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch change system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not waiting for the reception of the prefetch change system command (B1701). When the above-described read-ahead change system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of a read-ahead change system command is being awaited. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “N”), the prefetch change command processing is ended. If waiting for the reception of the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “Y”), the read change flag for the prefetch change command is cleared (B 1702).

  Next, the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703). The sub-prediction change command MODE portion is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the in-sub-prediction change command MODE part and the ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to other than 0. When the converted MODE part and ACT part are both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds The file is saved in the read ahead change command area (the special view look ahead change command area or the special view 2 look ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is judged whether or not the combination of the converted MODE portion and ACT portion is normal (B1710).

  It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes according to the number of reservations when holding starts the variable display game. When the suspension starts the variable display game, if there is no other suspension, it becomes the longer first half fluctuation, and if the new suspension occurs and the number of reservations is large, it becomes the shorter first half fluctuation. Therefore, the MODE portion of the received prefetch change system command is converted into the in-sub-prediction change command MODE portion so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled the same even if the time value of the first half change is transitioned.

  In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second-half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub-prediction fluctuation command ACT portion does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the second half fluctuation) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult . For example, normal reach also includes types such as normal reach-1 stop and normal reach + 1 stop. Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is converted into the same sub inner pre-reading fluctuation command ACT part, thereby reducing the number and reducing the burden of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing.

  Next, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B 1710 is “N”), it is regarded that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B 1710 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (information of the latest hold) targeted for pre-reading from the pre-reading fluctuation command area (B1711), the pre-reading lottery process regarding pre-reading effect of the latest retention is executed (B1712).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold previewing notice effect occurs (B1713). If the latest hold previewing advance notice effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the hold information corresponding to the existing hold is loaded (B1714), and the change effect based on the hold of the prefetch mode and the change effect based on the existing hold The content is compared (B1715).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the same variation content exists in the comparison process of B1715 (B1716). If the same variation content does not exist (the result of B1716 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the pre-reading effect content (B1717), and ends this processing.

  If the same variation content exists (the result of B1716 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 saves the prefetch execution flag in a predetermined temporary area (B1718), and the number of pending reservations currently stored Save (B1719).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated advance notice effect is an effect to be started immediately (B1720). There are, for example, pending change notices in the effect that starts immediately. If the preview advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1720 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1721), and the role control corresponding to the selected prefetch effect Information is set (B1722). Then, the prefetch change command processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the preview control effect of the latest hold is not generated (the result of B 1713 is “N”), or the effect control device 300 is not the effect that the preview effect of the generated preview is started immediately (the result of B 1720 is “N”). ), As it is. End the read ahead variation command processing.

[Control of Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163 and FIG. 164, the control process performed in the modification 1 of the second embodiment (superimposing effect) will be described. Specifically, a step corresponding to the modification 1 of the second embodiment is added to part of the round effect setting process and the ending effect setting process. The different steps are described as "C ****".

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the round effect setting process performed in the first modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the round effect setting process shown in FIG. 155 will be mainly described.

  In the first modification of the second embodiment, a part of the number of acquired balls during the short opening is not reflected in a timely manner and is not displayed, and is added as an additional (+ 球 sphere) at the end of the ending screen Display means). In the control, following the processing of B2313, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to display the number of acquired balls during the short opening (C1001).

  When the screen is displayed (the result of C1001 is "Y"), the processing after B2314 is executed, and the cumulative number of acquired balls including the number of currently acquired balls is immediately displayed on the screen. On the other hand, when the screen is not displayed (the result of C1001 is "N"), the processing after B2315 is executed.

  Here, the number of acquisition balls for which the screen is not displayed is added by the additional effect in the ending effect setting process described below. An additional display means is realized by such processing.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process executed in the first modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 158 will be mainly described.

  The number of acquired balls in the short opening which is not displayed is added to the non-displayed counter in the round effect setting process, and is additionally added in the ending effect setting process.

  Subsequent to the process of B2606, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the non-displayed acquired number of balls based on the non-displayed counter (C2001), and adds the non-displayed counter to the total acquired game number of balls (C2002) . Next, the effect control device 300 sets the additional effect (C2003), and resets the non-display counter (C2004). Subsequently, the process after B2607 is executed.

  The additional effect is an effect to be added again to the total number of balls shown in FIG. 84 (?), But if the process of C1002 is executed multiple times and the non-display counter is added multiple times, the additional effect is It may be performed multiple times.

[Control of Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the control process executed in the second modification (item / benefit provision) of the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the round effect setting process performed in the second modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the round effect setting process shown in FIGS. 155 and 163 will be mainly described.

  In the second modification of the second embodiment, an icon is selected with reference to the display icon table (see FIG. 87) each time a prize is generated at the big winning opening in the short opening (lottery means), which is acquired in the ending effect The effect based on the icon is executed (acquisition effect means). In the control, following to the processing of B2313, the effect control device 300 randomly selects an item character based on the selection rate of the display icon table (C1003), and the selected item character is a specific character or not It is determined (C1004). Specific item characters are, for example, a ★ icon, a peach icon, a note icon, a treasure box icon, and the ☆ icon is excluded.

  If it is a specific item character (the result of C 1004 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets a privilege corresponding to the item character (C 1005).

  If the character is not a specific item character (the result of C 1004 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the processing of B 2315 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of C 1005.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart of an ending effect setting process performed in the second modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the ending effect setting process shown in FIGS. 158 and 164 will be mainly described.

  Following the process of B2606, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a specific item character has been acquired through the present big hit (C2005).

  When a specific item character is obtained (the result of C2005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines the number of points based on the total number of acquired game balls (C2006), and the number of points and the specific character Set the display of (C2007). The setting of the display of the specific character is, for example, a display in which a peach is broken. After that, the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B2607.

  If the specific item character has not been acquired (the result of C2005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets a bonus image (C2008), and executes the processing of C2004 and thereafter.

[Control of Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167A, FIG. 167B, and FIG. 168, the control process performed in the modification 3 of the second embodiment (state indication display according to the meter level) will be described.

  FIG. 167A is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a round effect setting process performed in the third modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the round effect setting process shown in FIGS. 155, 163 and 165 will be mainly described.

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the meter level increases according to the amount of operation of the operation button 25 and the state indication display changes according to the meter level. In the control, following the processing of B2312, the effect control device 300 calculates the remaining big hit time from the remaining open number and the interval time (C1007), and sets the display of the remaining big hit time (C1008).

  After that, the effect control device 300 executes the processing after B2314.

[Effect button operation effect processing]
FIG. 167B is a flowchart showing the procedure of an effect button operation effect process executed in Modification 3 of the second embodiment. The effect button operation effect process is executed in the effect button input process (B0009) in the main process (effect control device). The effect button operation effect process is a process of updating the operation input counter based on the operation mode and setting the meter effect based on the operation input counter.

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect button operation effect is being executed (B2701). When the effect button operation effect is being executed (the result of B 2701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not there is an operation input of the operation button 25 (B 2702).

  If there is an operation input of the operation button 25 (the result of B 2702 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next updates the operation input counter corresponding to the operation mode of the operation button 25 (B 2703). The operation mode of the operation button 25 is, for example, the amount of operation of the operation button 25, the operation time, the operation order, etc., and as described above, since the operation button 25 can finely detect the operation area, it is pressed by the palm. By specifying the position of the part touched by the finger in addition to the operation such as continuous hitting and long pressing, the operation input corresponding to the operation order and the operation method (widening or narrowing by a plurality of contact parts, etc.) The counter is updated.

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets a meter effect based on the operation input counter (B2704), and ends this processing.

  When the effect button operation effect is not being executed (the result of B 2701 is “N”), when there is no operation input of the operation button 25 (the result of B 2702 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this processing. .

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process executed in the third modification of the second embodiment. The steps different from the ending effect setting process shown in FIGS. 158, 164 and 166 will be mainly described.

  Following the process of B2606, the effect control device 300 determines whether the operation input counter is the upper limit value (C2009). The upper limit value of the operation input counter may be set to the upper limit value of the meter level, or a value higher than the upper limit value of the meter level may be set.

  If the operation input counter is the upper limit (the result of C2009 is “Y”), the operation input counter is reset (C2013), and the processes after B2607 are executed. When the operation input counter is the upper limit value, the suggested character set in B2602 or B2604 is displayed (state suggestion effect is executed).

  If the operation input counter is not the upper limit (C2009), the effect control device 300 determines whether the operation input counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (C2010). Here, the predetermined value is set to a half value of the upper limit value.

  If the operation input counter is equal to or more than the predetermined value (the result of C2010 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the state indication display (indication cache) based on the selectivity of the reset table shown in FIG. (C2011) and execute the processing of C2013 or later. Therefore, the state indication display set in B2602 or B2604 is overwritten.

  If the operation input counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (the result of C2010 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the state indication display to non-display (C2012), and executes the processing of C2013 and thereafter.

(Third Embodiment [Screen Transition])
The details of the game effect of the third embodiment will be described below with reference to the screen transition diagrams, time charts, and flowcharts of FIGS. 169 to 196. FIGS. 169 to 196 are screen transition diagrams, time charts, and flowcharts showing an example of the screen effect on the display device 41, and the previous effect mode in the reach with high expectation is temporarily displayed until the next reach with high expectation. An example of the effect will be described.

[Display history]
FIGS. 169 and 170 are diagrams for explaining an example in which the VS reach, which is one of the high reach of the third embodiment, is produced in order, and FIG. 171 is a time chart of the same effect. The VS reach is a kind of SP (SPCIAL) reach having a higher degree of expectation than the normal reach, and for example, the degree of expectation is set to be higher in the order of normal reach <VS reach <SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach. Since VS reach is included in SP reach, VS reach may be described simply as SP reach.

  In addition, different types of effects such as A effect and B effect are prepared for each reach type (system of reach) from normal reach to SP3 reach, and effect times of the same time are set for A effect and B effect. That is, the A effect of VS reach and the B effect of VS reach are the same time. On the other hand, different presentation times are set as presentation times when the types of reach are different. That is, different presentation times are set for the A effects of VS reach and the A effects of SP1 reach.

  A quadrangle circled white circle shown in (A) of FIG. 169 is a starting memory currently executing the variable display game in the digestive reserve display area 88. A black circle is a start memory serving as a big hit, and the color is changed and displayed for easy understanding, but the same display mode (white circle) as another start memory may be used.

  The digestion holding display area 88 is an area for displaying the starting memory being executed, and the area at the lower left of the screen (the lower left display area 552) is an area where the starting memory or the like being held is displayed. The central display area 551 displays an identification symbol, an image effect based on a variable display game (variation effect), and the like.

  When the reach state shown in (I) is reached and the transition to the VS reach effect screen shown in (E) is developed, an ally character (friend character) is displayed on the left side of the central display area 551 on the VS reach effect screen, for example. , The enemy character (enemy character) is displayed on the right. Furthermore, the identification symbol is moved from the central display area 551 to the upper left display area 553 at the upper left of the screen and displayed in a smaller size.

  (E) is a first strike attack punch of the enemy character, and a state of VS reach (for example, A of VS reach) is executed. In (E), the VS reach effect with an increase in the degree of expectation is obtained, but an effect with a decrease in the degree of expectation, for example, a plurality of enemy characters may be displayed.

  In (O), an effect in which the teammate character loses is displayed, and the third movable role object 620a shown in (A) is in the operating state, and the third movable object 600a (upper right movable member 610 in the central display area 551) The enemy character attack scene of VS reach is displayed small as a history in a central effect area 551a surrounded by a broken line formed by the lower left movable member 620).

  After that, when the fluctuation speed of the identification symbol during fluctuation decreases in the upper left display area 553, as shown in (), in the central effect area 551a, the identification symbol in the reach state is the upper left display area The display of the VS reach history, which has been moved from 553 and displayed small in the central effect area 551a, is moved and displayed to the lower right display area 555 at the lower right of the screen.

  When the identification symbol is moved to the central effect area 551a, the identification symbol is displayed larger than that displayed in the upper left display area 553 and the middle symbol is temporarily stopped.

  When the history display moves from the central effect area 551a to the lower right display area 555, it is displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player. For example, it may be displayed in a mode close to the background color so as to make the history display inconspicuous, or may be displayed with a bright display color or being lit so as to stand out.

  The transition from the screen (?) To () may be the timing at which a specific character is displayed, the timing at which a specific effect is executed, or the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. .

  In the transition from screen (?) To (), the display screen may be moved first to move the identification symbol to the central display area 551, or the history display is moved to the lower right display area 555. The third movable part 620a may be in the initial position or in the operating position. That is, as the history image moves from the inside to the outside divided by the third movable part 620a, the identification symbol may be moved earlier or later, and the third movable part 620a may be rotated earlier or later. The order of the identification symbol, the history display, and the movement and operation of the third movable part 620a may be any combination.

  By moving the history display from the inside to the outside divided by the third movable character 620a, the history display is displayed not as a mere impressionable image but as a history with continuity and continuity in the game. It can be made to be recognized by the player. In addition, since the player who is in contact with the main presentation for the first time can understand the meaning of the continued display of the history image at the time of the next VS reach presentation execution, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, as shown in (G), the identification symbol of the detachment mode is displayed large. The third movable role object 620a returns to the initial position on the way from () to ().

  Subsequently, (D) of FIG. 170 shows a screen in which the next start memory change display game is started and reached state.

  Subsequently, in (b), the third movable character object 620a moves to the operation position, and notifies that the reach is developed, and the history of the previous VS reach, which was displayed in the lower right display area 555, is central staging Displayed in the area 551a, the present reach also implicitly or explicitly notifies that the VS reach is produced.

  In (a), the second movable role 500a moves to the operating position and hides the previous history display. The third movable part 600a may also be moved to the operating position at this timing.

  Subsequently, in (S), the second movable character 500a and the third movable character 620a return to their initial positions, and at the same time, the effect of VS reach of the variable display game of this time is displayed, and a big hit is predicted in (S). After the effect screen is displayed, it becomes a final screen of the big hit with (せ).

  FIG. 171 is a time chart showing the screen transition shown in FIG. 169 and FIG. 170 and the operation timing of each prize.

  In the first variable display game, at the timing when the effects of VS reach end (from (o) to (?) In FIG. 169), the third movable role 620a rotates to the operation position, and temporary stop of the identification symbol is When finished (from (k) to (k) in FIG. 169), the third movable part 620a pivots to the initial position.

  In the second variable display game, the third movable part 620a is pivoted to the operating position again (FIG. 170 (の)), and then after the second movable commercial item 500a is pivoted to the operating position (FIG. 170) (S)), VS reach is started again when both characters return to the initial position.

  In this way, when a part of the SP reach scene is displayed as a history in the screen corner and the same SP reach is performed again, a part of the SP reach scene is displayed from the screen corner along with the feature operation. The player's attention is moved to a place where the player's attention is drawn and displayed, and the same type of SP reach as the history is executed by the same manner of presentation.

[Example of replacement of rendering and example of switching]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174, change of reach effect (replacement of effect, switching of effect) will be described. FIG. 172 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an example (replacement example) of executing the same VS reach in a manner different from the history of the third embodiment. FIG. 173 is a screen transition diagram for explaining an example (switching example) of executing SP reach of a type (system) different from the SP reach of history in the third embodiment. FIG. 174 is a time chart of the effects (switch effect) of FIG. 173 of the third embodiment.

  In the present invention, there are cases where sub-substrates (rendering control devices) are replaced with different effects within the reach of the same type (same system) and cases where effects are switched to reach of different types (separate systems). First, an example of effect replacement (replacement) will be described with reference to FIG.

  From (G) to (S) in FIG. 172 are the same screens as (G) to (S) in FIG. 170, and the screen transition up to this point is the same as in FIGS.

  In FIG. 172, (S) shows a state where two enemy characters appear and VS reach (for example, VS reach B effect) is performed to apply first strike attack. Here, the contents of presentation are replaced by the sub-board from the A presentation of VS reach to the B presentation of VS reach.

  (Su) is a state in which the teammate character loses, and (Su) is a state in which the second VS reach is also determined to be released.

  As described later, whether or not to replace for each reach effect is determined based on the replacement ratio defined in the off / perch variation pattern table (see FIG. 194), as described later. Even when the same reach as the reach displayed as the history is executed, the player is replaced by an effect different from the reach effect of the history (A effect to B effect or B effect to A effect). Can give surprises and broaden the range of effects.

  Next, referring to FIG. 173, an example of effect switching will be described.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect that can be switched to an effect of a different type of reach (reach of a different system) from that of FIG. The screens up to (en) of FIG. 173 are the same screens up to (en) of FIG. 170, and the screen transition up to here is the same as that of FIG. Although FIG. 173 also shows the same screen as FIG. 170, it differs from the transition diagram of FIG. 170 in that the second movable part 500a is not rotated to the operating position thereafter.

  (S) to (S) in FIG. 173 are states in which the effect content is switched to SP1 reach (for example, A effect of SP1 reach) different from VS reach. It is not the VS reach effect by the attack and defense effect patterns so far, but the effect is changed to the SP1 reach effect by the effect by the short distance running, and the state where the identification symbol is determined is shown.

  FIG. 174 is a time chart showing the screen transition shown in FIG. 173 and the operation timing of each bonus item.

  In the first variable display game, when the third movable part 620a is turned to the operating position at the timing when the effect of VS reach is ended and the temporary stop of the identification symbol is ended, the third movable part 620a is at the initial position Turn to

  In the second variable display game, when the third movable part 620a returns to the initial position after the third movable part 620a is pivoted to the operating position again ((h) in FIG. 173), it is displayed as a history SP1 reach production different from the previous VS reach is started.

  As described above, although a part of the SP reach scene is displayed as a history at the screen corner, the SP reach may be switched to an SP reach different from the previous SP reach displayed. In the switching of the effect, whether or not to replace for each reach effect is determined by the sub substrate. By switching to a different type of reach effect from the history reach effect (for example, from VS reach effect to SP1 reach effect), as in the replacement of the effect, giving the player unexpectedness and broadening the width of the effect Can.

[Correction effect]
FIG. 175 illustrates an example of the correction effect executed to adjust the fluctuation time when the SP reach effect different from the previous SP reach displayed as the history of the third embodiment is changed (switched) It is a figure to do.

  The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main substrate to the sub-substrate, and can not be shortened or lengthened in the sub-substrate. Therefore, when the sub-substrate side changes (switches) the effect to be shorter than the fluctuation command including the fluctuation time transmitted from the main substrate, the correction effect for adjusting the margin of the fluctuation time is executed.

  The correction effect may be performed after the SP reach effect, as shown in (A) of FIG. 175, or may be performed before the SP reach effect, as shown in (B). It is selected from a specific image common as an effect or a plurality of images prepared as a correction effect and executed.

[History display, replacement of effects, effect of corrected effects]
Thus, the history information of the SP reach once produced is displayed in a specific area of the display device 41 until the start of the next SP reach production, and the SP reach of the history and the SP reach to be executed this time are identical. In the case where the expectation of being a big hit is very high or it is always a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the game with a novel effect such as never before.

  In addition, since substitution of effects is executed in the sub substrate, the frequency of effects of a specific effect can be changed on the sub side regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate, thus providing a more versatile effect environment. be able to.

  In addition, even if the effect of different fluctuation time is executed on the sub side with respect to the fluctuation time determined by the main board, it is possible to match the margin until the next start of fluctuation by the correction effect, and the attractive correction effect Can improve the interest of the game.

[Continuous production (continuous notice)]
FIGS. 176 to 180 are screen transition diagrams regarding continuous rendering (continuous advance notice). First, an example of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179.

  FIG. 176, FIG. 177 and FIG. 178 are screen transition diagrams for explaining an example of the continuous effect of the third embodiment. Further, FIG. 179 is a time chart for explaining the operation timings of the variable display game and prizes shown in FIG. 176 to FIG. 178 of the third embodiment.

  In (A) to (F) of FIG. 176, although reach reaches VS reach, the friend character loses due to the first strike attack punch of the enemy character, and the variation display game is determined in a losing manner. As shown in (K), after the effect that the ally character loses is displayed, that is, after the end of the VS reach, the third movable role product 620a is turned to the operation position, and the central effect area 551a is moved to the current VS The image which leaves the contents of reach as a history is displayed.

  In (d) to (d) of FIG. 177, while the third movable role object 620a is pivoted to the operation position, the starting memory is successively digested, and a continuous effect is being executed. In the central effect area 551a, the identification symbol is variably displayed in the upper left display area 553 while the VS reach history image is displayed. Prior to the start of the continuous effect, or in the middle of the continuous effect, the effect may be such that the player can clearly recognize that the continuous effect is being performed (is being performed).

  When the second movable part 500a is turned to the operating position and the history image is covered once, the second movable part 500a and the third movable part 620a move in (d). Returning to the initial position, the current reach develops to VS reach, and the contents with high degree of expectation started from the attack of the allied character are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in (h), the win of the teammate character is displayed, and in (d), the stop screen of the identification symbol representing the big hit confirmation is displayed.

  In addition, when there is start memory which has been decided which SP reach is decided by the aspect change by prefetching, it transfers to the production | presentation of SP reach confirmation pending. In addition, when the memory of the big hit is generated while the third movable part 620a is in operation, the second movable part 500a is turned from the middle to the operation position, and the big hit effect May be performed.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 179, at the end timing of the first VS reach, the third movable role product 620a is integrally pivoted to the operation position, and thereafter, in the VS reach after being twice shifted, The second movable role 500a also pivots to the operating position, and both pivots to the initial position at the end of the second VS reach.

[Look ahead interlocking production]
FIG. 180 is a screen transition diagram in the case where not the history of SP reach of the third embodiment but the same display as the pre-reading effect (hold display change) is displayed in the third movable role object 620a. Here, the hold display mode of the read-ahead start memory is displayed in the central effect area 551a at the time of execution of reach effect, so that the type of reach of the read-ahead start memory and the type of reach executed this time are linked .

  In (a), the pre-reading effect is executed for the third start memory, and the mode is changed from white circle to white circle marked with x.

  (I) is a state in which the variable display game currently being executed (the first start memory) is a reach, and (U) is a state in which it is developed to a VS reach. The pre-reading effect may be triggered by the development into a VS reach, or the pre-reading effect may be executed at the timing when the reach is developed.

  (E) to (O) are the timings in which the teammate character loses due to the first strike attack of the enemy character, and the timing at which the VS reach effect is finished. In (A), the third movable role object 620a is pivoted to the operation position, "VS" is displayed in the central effect area 551a, and the fact that VS reach has been executed is displayed as a history. At this time, since the effect that the ally character has lost is performed, the degree of expectation is low. Even in this state, the identification symbol is displayed in the upper left display area 553 and the reach continues.

  (Ki) is a state in which the mode of the start memory display in which the pre-reading effect has been executed is displayed in the central effect area 551a, suggesting that the effect will continue without the end of the effect with the expectation degree lowered at one end doing. Moreover, it has suggested that the reach of the read-ahead start memory and the present reach production are linked.

  As the start memory display of the pre-reading effect mode moves from the center display area 551 to the upper right display area 554, the identification symbol during the change of the upper left display area 553 is temporarily stopped in the third movable part 620a. It is in the state of doing. The pre-reading effect mode moved to the upper right display area 554 is displayed as a history, for example, until the next same reach execution.

[Effect of continuous production, look-ahead interlocking production]
As described above, since staging effects are executed by continuous rendering, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in stages.

  Further, with the execution of the pre-reading effect, the development of reach occurs, and not the pre-read starting memory but the high-expected effect is executed for the fluctuation (that is, the high-expected effect is executed ahead) The game is more innovative than ever, thus improving the interest of the game.

  Alternatively, when the pre-reading effect is executed in response to the development of the reach, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is given a sense of profit.

Modification 1 of Third Embodiment
Next, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 191. FIG. In the third embodiment, the history of the previous SP reach is displayed small, for example, as a punch image of an enemy character. On the other hand, in the modification 1 of the third embodiment, the SP reach history is displayed as an icon of the reach type, and when it reaches a reach, the same as the previous SP reach while digesting the history displayed icons A judgment effect (specific effect) to determine whether it is an SP reach is executed.

[Judgment production (specific production)]
FIGS. 181 to 184 are screen transition diagrams for explaining an example of the determination effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment.

  In (a) to (a) of FIG. 181, reach is developed to VS reach, and the allied character loses production. In (a), the third at the timing when the production of the VS reach is finished. The movable role product 620a is pivoted to the operating position, and the central effect area 551a is notified by displaying "VS" that the VS reach has been executed.

  (F) is a state in which the display of "VS" displayed in the central effect area 551a is iconified (VS icon, history icon) inside the third movable part 620a.

  The symbol icon moves to the upper right display region 554 and is displayed so that the identification symbol moves to the central effect area 551a and is pushed out accordingly in response to a decrease in the fluctuation speed of the identification symbol, etc. It is a state.

  When the identification symbol moves to the central effect region 551a, it is displayed larger in the inner region divided by the third movable part 620a than when displayed in the upper left display region 553 and the middle symbol is temporarily stopped.

  When the history icon moves to the lower right display area 555, it is displayed in a manner visible to the player in the outer area partitioned by the third movable role 620a. For example, the history icon may be displayed in a manner close to the background color so as not to be noticeable, or may be displayed with a bright display color or light so as to be noticeable.

  The transition from the screen (k) to the screen (k) may be a timing at which a specific character is displayed, a timing at which a specific effect is executed, or a timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. .

  Also, in order to transit from the screen (k) to (k), the moving order of the display screen may be prior to the identification symbol moving to the central effect area 551a, and the history icon moves to the lower right display area 555 The third movable part 620a may be in the initial position or in the operating position. That is, as the history icon moves from the inside to the outside where the third movable part 620a divides, the movement of the identification symbol may be earlier or later, and the third movable part 620a may be rotated earlier or later. The order of the identification symbol, the history icon, and the movement and operation of the third movable part 620a may be any combination.

  By moving the history icon from the inside to the outside divided by the third movable character 620a, the history icon is displayed not as a mere impressionable image but as a history of continuity and continuity in the game. It can be made to be recognized by the player. In addition, since the player who is in contact with the main presentation for the first time can understand the meaning of the continued display of the history icon at the time of the next VS reach presentation execution and the execution of the judgment presentation to be described later, the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The display of "VS" in the central effect area 551a is iconified in (ki), and the iconized VS icon is moved to the upper right display area 554 to be displayed as a history, and the display of (VS) in FIG. ) Is a state where the variation is determined in the removal mode.

  In this case, a new variation display game is started to become a reach mode, and in the state where the reach has developed into the SP1 reach.

  (Su) informs the central effect area 551a that the effect of the variation is SP1. (S) is a state in which the display of SP1 is iconified.

  In the case (1), the SP1 icon moves to the upper right display area 554 and is displayed as a history below the VS icon, and (1) is a state in which the variation is determined in the removal mode.

  In (ch) of FIG. 183, a new variation display game is started to be a reach mode, and in (d), the SP1 icon displayed in the upper right display area 554 is displayed moved to the central effect area 551a. It is a state.

  (T) is a state where the effect of determining whether or not the current reach is the same as the SP reach that is the previous SP reach is displayed in the central effect area 551a. In (g), in the central effect area 551a, the identification symbol in change is displayed, and the judgment effect may be executed in another area other than the central effect area 551a.

  Since the determination result in () is not the same, the VS icon displayed as the history is moved to the central effect area 551a and displayed. After this, a determination effect of whether or not the current reach is the same as the VS reach is executed.

  (N) is a state in which the second movable role object 500a moves to the operation position and hides the second determination effect. The second movable combination 500 a pivots to the operating position when the same determination is made.

  Since the result of the determination is that the current reach is the same as the VS reach displayed as the history, the effect of the VS reach is started. After that, it is transitioned to (Nu) to (n) with VS reach production and a big hit decision. However, even if it is determined in the determination effect that the current reach is the same as the icon displayed as the history, it does not necessarily become a big hit.

  In this modification, the identification symbol is displayed small in the upper left display area 553 when the SP reach effect is executed or the third movable part 620a is operated, but the identification symbol is determined by the third movable part 600a. It may be displayed in the divided central effect area 551a, in which case it is displayed smaller or lighter than the image relating to the SP reach so that the identification symbol is not noticeable.

  Further, the icon displayed as the SP reach history information may be displayed as an icon by a character or an image associated with each SP reach type other than the aspect in which the SP reach type is displayed as characters, and only the still mode It may be displayed by the moving aspect.

[Operation interlock]
FIGS. 185 to 186 are screen transition diagrams for explaining another example of the determination effect executed in the first modification of the third embodiment, and FIG. 187 is a time chart of the same. Here, before the start of the judgment effect, a button screen (rendering portion promotion image) prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and when the effect button 25 is operated, the process shifts to the judgment effect.

  (T) of FIG. 185 is the same screen as (T) of FIG. 183, and the screen transition up to here is the same as that of FIG.

  In FIG. 185, the button screen is displayed in the central effect area 551a, and the player is urged to operate the effect button 25. At the timing of (d), the effect button 25 is operated. There is.

  In (and), in response to the reception of the operation of the effect button 25, the determination effect based on the SP1 icon is being executed. Since the determination results are not identical, the effect is that smoke rises from the button on the button screen, and a mysterious atmosphere is expressed.

  In (a), since the determination based on the SP1 icon is not the same, the VS icon is next moved to the central effect area 551a, and (b) is a state in which a button screen is displayed. At the timing of (), the effect button 25 is operated.

  (N) is a state in which the determination effect based on the VS icon is executed in response to the operation of the effect button being accepted, and the second movable role object 500a is rotated to the operation position, and thereafter (N)- As shown in (H), after the production of VS reach, it becomes the screen of the big hit decision.

  If it is determined that they are the same as the determination result in the determination effect, the second movable role object 500a moves to the operation position, and if it is determined that they are not the same, it is an effect that the smoke rises.

  The time chart of FIG. 187 shows the operation states of both role products when the effect button 25 is operated. In response to the effect button 25 being operated in the display period of the button screen, the first determination effect is executed, and in the second determination effect, the second movable role object 500a is also turned by being determined to be identical. It is moving.

  In addition, when the button operation is not received, the determination effect may not be executed, and the screen may become a reach effect after development and a determination screen of an identification symbol thereafter. In addition, even when the button operation is not accepted, the determination effect may be automatically executed.

[Simulated series production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188 to FIG. 192, transition of the screen and the like in the case where the simulated sequential effect in the modification 1 of the third embodiment is executed will be described.

  FIG. 188 to FIG. 189 are screen transition diagrams in the case where the pseudo-simulation effect in the first modification of the third embodiment is performed.

  (A) of FIG. 188 is in a state in which the variable display game based on the white circle start memory is executed, and (I) is in a state of being in the reach mode.

  (E) ~ (O), reach reaches VS reach and becomes VS reach effect, but it becomes loss effect of the ally character, and (?) That the upper right movable member 610 rotates and the said fluctuation It is the state decided in the outfall mode.

  (F) is a state in which the variable display game based on the black circle start memory is executed and it is in the reach mode of “5 ↓ 5”. (G) is moved so that the identification symbol on the right side temporarily stopped at "5" slides upward, "6" is displayed, and the first pseudo connected effect is started. The lower left movable member 620 is pivoted at the timing of (ii) which is the first pseudo run.

  (D) is a state in which the middle identification symbol being changed is displayed as a special symbol representing a pseudo ream, and is herein represented as "C".

  The second movable part 500a is temporarily moved to the operating position, and the second part is a state in which the second pseudo-run is performed.

  (S) indicates that the second pseudo-sequence effect is in the reach state, and (S) indicates that the first movable combination 410 a is in the operating state. The first movable part 410 a may be lowered from above the display device 41 to the front of the display device 41. The operation of the first movable role item 410a notifies that the degree of expectation is very high.

  From (set) to (set) are the screens of VS reach production and the subsequent big hit decision.

  FIG. 190 is a screen transition diagram showing another example of the pseudo continuous effect of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. This shows the case where the identification symbol in the temporarily stopped pseudo fluctuation moves so as to slide downward instead of upward.

  In (a) of FIG. 190, the upper right movable member 610 is pivoted to the operating position so as to push down the left symbol so as to push down the left symbol temporarily stopped at “5 ↓ 5” and to slide downward. It has moved.

  (I) is a state in which "6" has fallen from above to the left symbol, and (U) is a state in which a special symbol dedicated to pseudo ream is displayed on the middle symbol during fluctuation.

  Here, the effect that the left identification symbol is pushed down by the upper right movable member 610 has been described, but the lower left movable member 620 may be rotated and the left identification symbol may be pushed up, or the right identification symbol is pushed up. It is also good. Thus, by combining the individual pivoting motion of the upper right movable member 610 and the lower left movable member 620 with the fluctuation of the identification symbol, the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 191 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of pseudo continuous variation according to the first modification of the third embodiment. The transition to (a) of FIG. 191 is the same as (a) of FIG.

  In Fig. 189, "(た)" is displayed as "あ" in the inner area formed by the third movable character 620a, and "続 く" is displayed next to the "領域" in the outside area. "Ah!" Is displayed. The background display of the central effect area 551a and the background display other than the central effect area 551a display continuous images.

  In the state (ii), the third movable role object 620a swings, and the image of the central effect area 551a also swings up and down, left and right. Further, the number of times of execution of the pseudo run is displayed in the upper right display area 554.

  As described above, while the background image having continuity or integrity is displayed in the respective regions inside and outside of the central effect region 551a formed by the third movable part 620a, the third movable part 620a is displayed. By also displaying the inner image in sync with the swing, the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 192 is a time chart of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. Here, it corresponds to the series of effects described in FIG. 188 to FIG.

  When the VS reach effect is determined, the upper right movable member 610 is rotated to the operating position ((188) in FIG. 188), and then the lower left movable member 620 is also rotated to the operating position (FIG. 188) (G)).

  After that, the second movable combination 500a temporarily moves to the operation position at the start of the second simulated combination effect ((A) in FIG. 189), and the first movable combination 410a is reached after reaching the second simulated combination effect. Temporarily becomes active ((S) in FIG. 189).

[Effect of Modification 1 of Third Embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, since the history information of a plurality of SP reach executed so far is iconified and displayed, it is desired that the player be welcomed to receive it and increase the number of displayed icons. It is expected to create a desire to increase the duration of the game.

  In addition, it is determined along with the effect whether or not the plurality of icons displayed as the history are sequentially or randomly the same as the type of the current reach, and depending on the result of the determination, the degree of expectation to be the subsequent effect mode or the big hit Because of the difference, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation when it is determined to be the same.

  In addition, by combining the judgment effects of a plurality of icon information with the continuous effects and the pseudo-sequence effects, the player can enjoy the fun of the game in order to foretell the player that the game will finally be a big hit with the exhilaration that digests the suspension of the icons. It can be greatly enhanced.

[Control of production content]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195, the control of the contents of the effects of the third embodiment will be described.

[Determination content determination processing]
FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an effect content determination process of the third embodiment. In the effect content determination process (B2019), in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 152), after all decisions up to the notice of the variable display game to be executed next are determined, switching of the reach content is changed or replaced Is executed as a process of determining

  FIG. 194 is a variation pattern table to be referred to in the effect content determination process of the third embodiment, (A) is a loss variation pattern table, and (B) is a hit variation pattern table. In both tables, the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of A effect or B effect of each SP reach (VS reach to SP3 reach) set according to ACTION, and A effect or B effect selected once are mutually replaced. Substitution rate is defined.

  Moreover, FIG. 195 is a figure showing the difference of the fluctuation | variation time value of each SP reach of 3rd Embodiment. The A effects and B effects of each reach are set to the same fluctuation time value.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the prefetch execution flag set in B1718 of the prefetch variation system command processing is set (B3001). If the prefetch execution flag is set (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the number of pending by −1 (B3002), and the number of pending is “0” or not It is determined whether or not (B3003). Only when the existing number of reservations is "0" (the result of B3003 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 clears the prefetch execution flag (B3004), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when the prefetch execution flag is not set (the result of B 3001 is “N”), the effect control device 300 is the reach type of the effect type information (VS reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach). It is determined whether information) is set (B3005). If the effect type information is set (the result of B3005 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the change effect content based on the effect type information and the change effect content corresponding to the change (B3006) Then, it is determined whether or not the change effect contents based on the effect type information and the change effect contents corresponding to the change loaded from the temporary area are the same (B3007).

  If the result of the determination is the same (the result of B3007 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change effect content corresponding to the change is not replaced (B3008, B3009). In this determination, it is determined with reference to the out-of- / perch variation pattern table shown in FIG. 131, and it is determined based on the replacement rate whether to replace the effect from A effect to B effect or B effect to A effect. Ru.

  For example, if the effect control content is not replaced (result of B3009 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 may, for example, draw whether or not to switch the change effect content (such as the type of SP reach) corresponding to the change. (B3010, B3011). When switching the change effect contents corresponding to the change (the result of B3011 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the change effect contents to be switched, for example, by lottery (B3012), and corresponds to the change The fluctuation time value of the fluctuation effect content and the fluctuation time value (rendering time) of the switched fluctuation effect content are compared, and it is determined whether or not they match (B3013, B3014).

  By switching the content of the change effect, the effect control device 300 changes as shown in FIG. 195 only when the change time value initially set does not match the change time value after switching (result of B3014 is "Y"). A correction effect corresponding to the difference time based on the time value difference table is set. As a result, the correction effect can be executed only for the difference time generated by the switching effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the effect type information (B3016), sets the item control information based on the set variation effect contents (B3017), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when the effect type information is not set (the result of B3005 is "N"), or the change effect content based on the effect type information and the change effect content corresponding to the change loaded from the temporary area are not identical In the case (the result of B3007 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the change effect contents corresponding to the change (B3018), effect type information (VS reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach, Save the type information of B) (B3019). Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the display content based on the effect type information (B3020), and for example, the SP reach history image or history displayed in the lower right display area 555 shown in FIG. An icon is set. Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes the process of B3017, and ends the present process.

  When replacing the fluctuation effect contents (the result of B3009 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the fluctuation effect contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 194 (b3021), and the processing after B3016 To complete this process.

  As described above, in the present process, replacement setting of the effect contents of the SP reach and history display of the SP reach are set.

[Effect content determination process corresponding to modification 1 of the third embodiment]
FIG. 196 shows effect content determination processing for executing the effect control of Modification 1 of the third embodiment. In the effect content determination process (modified example 1) of FIG. 196, the SP icon and the upper limit number of meters (for example, “10”) are set in comparison with the effect content determination process of FIG. Determine the order of determination with the change. Here, differences from the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 193 will be mainly described. The same steps as those in FIG. 193 have the same step numbers.

  When replacing the fluctuation effect content (the result of B3009 is "N"), when changing the fluctuation effect content is not switched (the result of B3011 is "N"), when setting the correction effect when changing the fluctuation effect content (B3015) In the control corresponding to the first modification, the effect control device 300 subsequently sets the extraction order of the effect type information (B3301), and sets the notice effect contents (decision effect etc.) based on the extraction order (B3015) B3302).

  In B3301, the extraction order of the history information is set such as the old order, the new order, and the random order in which the history icons are generated.

  Next, the effect control device 300 clears all the effect type information (B3016), and resets the effect type information counter (B3303). Next, the effect control device 300 sets role-effect control information based on the set effect contents (B3017), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if the effect type information is not set (the result of B3005 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the change effect content corresponding to the change (B3018), and updates the effect type information counter by +1. (B3304). The effect type information counter is a counter of the number of history held as history information of the SP reach.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the effect type information counter is larger than the upper limit number (for example, “4”) (B3305). If it is larger than the upper limit number (the result of B3305 is “Y”), the history number reaches the upper limit, so the oldest effect type information is cleared (B3306) and the effect type information is saved (B3019) . When it is not larger than the upper limit number (the result of B3305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 saves the effect type information without clearing the oldest effect type information (B3019).

One Embodiment of Third Embodiment
The following can be mentioned as viewpoints related to the invention of the third embodiment described so far.

  (23) A display device capable of displaying an image, and control means for controlling execution of a game displayed on the display device can be provided, and a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated based on the result of the game Game machine, comprising: movable movable objects operable on the front of the display device; effect control means for controlling an effect of the game; and notification means capable of notifying an execution history of the game; The control means is capable of a plurality of types of effects leading the occurrence of the special gaming state, and the notification means is executed when a specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of effects. A gaming machine characterized by notifying that an execution history is until the next specific effect is executed.

  (24) The movable part temporarily moves to the front of the display device at the timing when the specific effect is executed, and the notification means is configured to select the specific part in the inner area divided by the movable part. The gaming machine according to (23), characterized by displaying an execution history of the effect.

  (25) When the effect control means executes the specific effect of any one of the plurality of types of effects, the specific effect type to be executed this time is notified as the execution history It comprises: determination means for determining whether it is the same as the type of effect, and determination-time effect means for executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the determination means, wherein the determination-time effect means includes The gaming machine according to (23) or (24), wherein different effects can be executed depending on whether it is determined to be identical or not.

  According to the invention of (23), the type of the last reach effect is displayed as a history until the same reach effect is generated, and the interest of the game is improved by the novel effect which has never been seen.

  According to the invention of (24), the movable role operates at the timing when the specific effect is executed, and the history is displayed in the area divided by the movable role, so that an effective effect can be provided.

  According to the invention of (25), since different effects are executed depending on the determination result of whether the type of the current reach and the type of the previous reach are the same, more effective effects can be provided.

10 game machine 12 front frame (play slot)
13 projection effect unit 14 cover glass 15 glass frame 25 operation button 30 game board 38 special winning device 38a specific area switch 38b specific area solenoid 38c V door 39 special variation winning device 39a large winning opening switch 39b large winning opening solenoid 39c opening and closing door 100 Game control device 300 effect control device 410 1st movable character unit 410a 1st movable character 500 2nd movable character unit 500a 2nd movable character 503 movable wiring fixed member 510 lift unit 600a movable character (3rd movable character object)
600a third movable part 640 lower left movable member wiring 641 wiring guide member 642 wiring (conductor)
643 banding band 644 band opening (passing opening)
700 Special Fluctuation Winning Device Unit 702 Rear Projection (Ship Part)
722 upper side wall 724 ball passage 724a ridged portion 725 front side ridge (portion)
731c V door opening 742 ridge (convex)
743 Step 780 V winning unit 850 Ball guiding part

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable role operable in response to the predetermined effect,
A drive mechanism for moving the movable part to the front of the display device;
A wire connectable to the movable part from the outside of the movable part;
And a wiring guide member for guiding the wiring.
A fixed portion for fixing the wire and the wire guide member are disposed on the outer periphery of the movable part,
The wiring guide member is
Rutotomoni is possible follow the wiring to the movable won game that forward movement of the front Symbol display device is capable ChakuHanare the wiring from the movable won game,
When the movable part is in front of the display device,
Defined areas partitioned by the movable role was formed on a screen area of the display device, the wiring guide member by a game machine, wherein holdable der Rukoto wires against the direction of movement of the movable won game . In a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a movable role operable in response to the predetermined effect,
A drive mechanism for moving the movable part to the front of the display device;
A wire connectable to the movable part from the outside of the movable part;
And a wiring guide member for guiding the wiring.
The movable part has a first wiring fixing portion capable of fixing the wiring, and a second wiring fixing portion.
When the movable part is at the initial position, the first wiring fixing part and the second wiring fixing part are disposed on a virtual straight line, and the movable part operates in front of the display device. Moving the second wiring fixing portion away from the virtual straight line;
The wiring guide member is
The wiring can be made to follow the movable combination disposed along the outer periphery of the movable combination and operating forward of the display device,
When the movable part is in front of the display device,
Defined areas partitioned by the movable role was formed on a screen area of the display device, the wiring toward the virtual line by the wire guide member characterized retainable der Rukoto against movement Yu technique machine. A display device capable of displaying a predetermined effect, and a movable role operable in response to the predetermined effect
In a gaming machine provided with
A drive mechanism for moving the movable part to the front of the display device;
A wire connectable to the movable part from the outside of the movable part;
And a wiring guide member for guiding the wiring.
The wiring guide member is
The wiring can be made to follow the movable combination disposed along the outer periphery of the movable combination and operating forward of the display device,
When the movable part is in front of the display device,
The divided area on the screen area of the display device by the outer periphery of the movable role was formed, Yu technique the wiring guide member disposed to the wiring in a part of the periphery characterized the next possible Rukoto holding Machine.

Images